System Manual Edition 03/2006
sirius
Totally
I n t e gr a t e d
Automation
MOTOR MANAGEMENT
SIMOCODE pro
Safety Guidelines
Table of Contents
Important Notes
System Description
Short Instructions for
Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
Motor Protection
Motor Control
Monitoring Functions
Outputs
Inputs
System Manual
Analog Value Recording
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Standard Functions
Logic Modules
Communication
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Commissioning and Servicing
Alarm, Faults and System
Messages
Tables
Data Formats and Data Records
Dimension Drawings
Technical Data
Example Circuits
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
Index
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Edition 03/2006
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
To
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
E
F
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more that one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
GERMANY
Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Edition 03/2006
Copyright © Siemens AG
Technical data subject to change
Table Of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.6
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.5
1.7.6
1.7.7
1.8
1.8.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check List for Selecting the Device Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules.
Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM)
for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
1-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-4
1-6
1-8
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-20
1-20
1-22
1-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-25
1-27
1-30
1-31
1-33
1-33
2
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Introduction and Target of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station . . . .
Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS
3
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Introduction . . . . . . .
Overload Protection . .
Unbalance Protection .
Stall Protection . . . . .
Thermistor Protection .
4
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors
Enables and Enabled Control Command
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-7
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
DP
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2-2
. 2-3
. 2-6
. 2-10
3-1
. 3-2
. 3-4
. 3-10
. 3-11
. 3-12
.
.
.
.
i
Table Of Contents
4.1.4
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
4.2.12
4.2.13
4.2.14
4.2.15
4.2.16
4.3
Control Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Settings and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Overload Relay" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Direct Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Star-delta Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"
Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Dahlander" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function .
"Pole-changing Switch" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"
Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Valve" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Positioner" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Soft Starter" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function . . . . . . . . . .
Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal
for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-13
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-22
4-24
.
.
.
.
4-27
4-31
4-34
4-38
.
.
.
.
.
4-41
4-45
4-47
4-52
4-54
. 4-57
5
Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.8
5.9
Earth fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Earth Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current
Current Limits Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I> (Upper Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I< (Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Power Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Hours Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Number of Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-10
5-12
5-14
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-21
5-23
6
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Introduction . . . . . . . .
Basic Unit Outputs. . . .
Operator Panel LEDs . .
Digital Module Outputs.
Analog Module Outputs
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
Transformer)
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
5-1
. 6-2
. 6-4
. 6-6
. 6-8
. 6-10
SIMOCODE pro
ii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Table Of Contents
6.6
6.7
Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
7
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Unit Inputs . . . . . .
Operator Panel Buttons. . .
Digital Module Inputs . . . .
Temperature Module Inputs
Analog Module Inputs . . . .
Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . .
Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-4
7-6
7-8
7-10
7-12
7-14
7-15
8
Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
9
3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
10
Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.9.1
10.9.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Position Feedback (TPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . .
Response for positioner control function . . . . . .
Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring)
Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timestamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . .
Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS
11
Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
Introduction . . . . . . .
Truth Table for 3I/1O .
Truth Table for 2I/1O .
Truth Table for 5I/2O .
Counters . . . . . . . . .
Timer . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Conditioner . . .
Non-volatile Elements .
Flashing . . . . . . . . .
Flickering . . . . . . . .
Limit Monitor . . . . . .
12
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1
12.2
12.3
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Telegram Description and Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
. 10-2
. 10-3
. 10-7
. 10-9
. 10-11
. 10-11
. 10-13
. 10-14
. 10-16
. 10-17
. 10-19
. 10-19
. 10-20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-2
11-3
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-10
11-13
11-16
11-19
11-20
11-21
iii
Table Of Contents
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.5
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.6
12.7
12.7.1
12.7.2
12.7.3
12.8
Cyclic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Data and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . .
Slave Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD
in the Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object
(DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . .
Evaluating Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES .
Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameterization via PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE ES Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting up Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
12.4.4
13.1
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
13.3.4
General Information about Mounting and Wiring. . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer
(Interposing Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current
Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules .
13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12-5
. 12-6
. 12-7
. 12-15
. 12-15
. 12-15
. 12-16
. 12-17
. 12-18
. 12-19
. 12-19
. 12-20
. 12-21
. 12-22
. 12-22
. 12-22
. 12-23
. 12-24
. 13-2
. 13-3
. 13-3
. 13-4
. 13-5
. 13-6
. 13-7
. 13-7
. 13-19
. 13-20
. . . . . . . 13-22
. . . . . . . 13-25
. . . . . . . 13-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 13-27
. 13-29
. 13-31
. 13-32
14
Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.3
14.3.1
General Information about Commissioning and Servicing
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-2
14-3
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-6
SIMOCODE pro
iv
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Table Of Contents
14.3.2 Saving the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
15
Alarm, Faults and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
A
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status
for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket Assignment Table - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket Assignment Table - Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
B.6
B.7
B.8
B.9
B.10
B.11
B.12
B.13
B.14
B.15
B.16
B.17
B.18
B.19
B.20
Messages
. . . . . . . A-2
. . . . . . . A-3
. . . . . . . A-5
. . . . . . . A-12
. . . . . . . A-14
Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing/reading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 72 - Fault Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 94 - Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 139 - Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 165 - Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 224 - Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for Predefined Control
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.1 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.2 Direct Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.5 Star-delta Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . .
B.20.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.20.10Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . .
B.20.11Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-1
B-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-2
B-2
B-3
B-3
B-4
B-6
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-15
B-16
B-17
B-22
B-26
B-32
B-35
B-36
B-36
B-37
B-38
B-39
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-40
B-40
B-41
B-42
B-43
B-44
B-45
B-46
B-47
B-48
B-49
B-50
v
Table Of Contents
B.20.12Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51
B.20.13Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
B.20.14Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
C
Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C.1
C.1.1
C.1.2
C.2
C.2.1
.
.
.
.
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
. .. .. .. .
C-3
. .. .. .. .
C-4
. .. .. .. .
C-5
. .. .. .. .
C-6
. .. .. .. .
. .. .. .. .
C-7
C-8
. .. .. .. .
C-8
. .. .. .. .
C-9
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.6.1
3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF710 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A , . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-15
D
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D.1
D.2
D.3
Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules and
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Temperature Module . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data of the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for
Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
D-3
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.3
C.3.1
C.3.2
C.3.3
C.3.4
C.3.5
D.4
D.4.1
D.4.2
D.4.3
D.4.4
D.5
D.6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . C-10
. . . . . . . . C-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
Short-circuit
.. .. .. ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. D-5
. D-7
. D-7
. D-8
. D-9
. D-9
. D-11
. . .D-12
SIMOCODE pro
vi
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Table Of Contents
E
Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.1
E.2
E.2.1
E.2.2
E.3
E.3.1
E.3.2
E.4
E.4.1
E.4.2
E.5
E.5.1
E.5.2
E.6
E.6.1
E.6.2
E.7
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "overload relay" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "direct starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "direct starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for a "reversing starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction
of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of
rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "Dahlander" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for the "valve" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the "positioner" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.7.1
E.7.2
E.8
E.8.1
E.8.2
E.9
E.9.1
E.9.2
E.10
E.10.1
E.10.2
E.11
E.11.1
E.11.2
E.12
E.12.1
E.12.2
E.13
E.13.1
E.13.2
E.13.3
E.13.4
E.13.5
E.13.6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-3
E-5
E-6
E-6
E-7
E-8
E-8
E-9
E-10
E-10
E-11
E-12
E-12
E-13
. E-14
. E-14
.
.
.
.
E-15
E-16
E-16
E-17
. E-18
. E-18
.
.
.
.
E-19
E-21
E-21
E-23
. E-24
. E-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-25
E-27
E-27
E-29
E-30
E-30
E-31
E-32
E-33
E-34
E-35
vii
Table Of Contents
E.13.7 Circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13.8 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13.9 Circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13.10Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit . . . . . .
E.15.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . . . . . .
E.15.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-36
E-37
E-38
E-39
E-40
E-40
E-42
E-43
E-44
E-46
F
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F.1
F.2
F.2.1
F.2.2
F.2.3
F.2.4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Rated Current of the Motor . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input. . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring of the Sensor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for
Type of Coordination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and Repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
F-3
F-3
F-5
F-6
F.2.5
F.2.6
F.2.7
F.2.8
F.3
F.4
F.5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
. F-6
. F-7
. F-7
. F-9
. F-9
. F-9
. F-9
. F-10
Index
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
viii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Important Notes
Purpose of the manual
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor management system and its functions. It contains information about configuring,
commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the
system quickly and practically using a typical reversing motor application as
an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and eliminating faults,
this manual also contains information of special importance to service and
maintenance personnel.
The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings and technical
data about the system components to assist you in carrying out the configuration.
Required basic knowledge
Basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digital
circuit engineering and automation technology is required in order to be able
to understand this manual.
Topics
This manual consists of instructional chapters which can be used to look up
specific information. The following table lists the most relevant topics. The
topics with a gray background represent the contents of the
"SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software.
Topic
System Description
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Motor Protection
Motor Control
Monitoring Functions
Target group
Configurators, planners
Configurators, planners, technicians, commissioners
Configurators, commissioners
Configurators, PLC programmers
Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service personnel
Outputs
Configurators, planners, programmers
Inputs
Configurators, planners, programmers
Analog Value Recording
Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service personnel
3UF50 Compatibility Mode Configurators, PLC programmers
Standard Functions
Configurators, programmers
Logic Modules
Configurators, programmers
Communication
Configurators, PLC programmers
Mounting, Wiring and
Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and service personnel
Interfaces
Commissioning and SerCommissioners, electricians, maintenance and service pervicing
sonnel
Alarms, Faults and System commissioners, maintenance and service personnel, configurators, PLC programmers
Messages
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
ix
Important Notes
Scope of application
This manual is applicable for the components included in the
SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that
are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to
include information about new components or new versions of components
in additional documents.
Further documentation
• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.
• The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.
Definitions
• If "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, then both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the
"SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.
Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro
Using SIMOCODE pro, specific responses (Disabled, Signalling, Warning,
Tripping) can be parameterized for various different types of functions
(e.g. overload). They are always displayed in tabular form:
• "X" = Applicable
• "-" = Not applicable
• "d" = Default.
Response
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Tripping
-
X (d)
X
Warning
X (d)
X
-
Signalling
X
X
-
Disabled
X
X
X (d)
0 - 25.5 s
-
-
Delay
Short description of the responses:
• Disabled: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are generated.
• Signalling: Only a device-internal signal is generated which can be further processed in any way.
• Warning: A warning signal which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP is
generated in addition to the device-internal signal.
• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is
generated which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP. The error message and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time
has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged.
A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill
in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back
to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.
SIMOCODE pro
x
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Important Notes
Exclusion of liability
The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks
as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety
system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods
for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the
safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to
as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
xi
Important Notes
SIMOCODE pro
xii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the
SIMOCODE pro V device series
• simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro
• a function overview
• an overview of the system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use
SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system
• optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information about SIMOCODE pro
• system integrators/process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about load feeders
• basic knowledge about motor protection
• basic knowledge of control engineering
• basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-1
System Description
1.1
Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP
interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP
system.
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which
combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and
short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit
breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.
SIMOCODE pro replaces large sections of the control circuit and also automatically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor feeder more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main
automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different
functions:
• SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters
and
• SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additional functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and positioners. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be
extended if required, e.g.
– the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are
adjustable, new types can be added
– a current/voltage Measuring module can be used for additional voltage
measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management)
– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors
– an earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation
current transformer
– an analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and outputs, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means
that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant according to your
requirements.
SIMOCODE pro
1-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. If the automation system (PLC) fails or if
communication is disrupted, the motor feeder also remains protected and
can still be controlled. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can be connected later according to need.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C
and SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro C
Basic unit (BU1)
Current measuring
module (IM)
UF-01129
Operator panel (OP)
Maximum configuration
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Current measuring
module (IM)
UF-01130
Operator panel (OP)
Additional optional expansions are possible
Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-3
System Description
1.2
Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following
wiring must be carried out:
• inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices,
current transformers, analog/digital converters
• wiring up the control circuit
• connecting the control devices for start/stop
• bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches
• wiring up the interlocks
The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V 1L1
L1
-F4
L2
L3
N
PE
-Q1
Automation level / I/O module
- K1
2 4 6
-X1
1 3 5
-K11
Manual
2 4 6
ON / OFF
-F3
Man. / aut.
Current
-K1
-Q1 open
OFF
-K1
Control commands
Thermistor
ON
Q1
Overload
Feedback
-F2-
1 3 5
-K11
-K12
Automatic
-X2
1 3 5
Local stop
S1
- F2
2 4 6
PE
UVW
M
3~
J
Local start
2
4...20 mA S2
1
PLC
Start/stop
-K1
-K12
-X3
-K1
-F3
Thermistor
evaluation
1
-F2
-F3
-Q1
D
A
Switchgear
2
N
1N
Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
SIMOCODE pro
1-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing.
This offers the following advantages:
• additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers, analog/digital converters are not necessary
• wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
• the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
• the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary
contact for locking is no longer necessary
The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PROFIBUS DP
L+
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
Control station local control [LC]
F11
S0
2 4 6
Current Measuring
module (IM)
A2
A1
S1
IN1
IN2
24 V
Basic unit (BU)
T1
T2
OUT 1
1
K1
1 3 5
N/L–
- K1
2 4 6
PE
U V W
T1
M
3~
J
Thermistor
T2
Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-5
System Description
1.3
Application Example
Description
The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level
(reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container.
The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and outputted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump
is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until the reference
value is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.
Controlling the pump
The pump can be controlled as follows:
• locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by
visual inspection)
• in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for switching on and off manually
• in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
• via SIMOCODE by means of internal logic modules.
Schematic
Control station
PLC/DCS [DP]
PLC/DCS
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PROFIBUS DP
L+
Fill-level indicator
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
Control station local control [LC]
F11
Current Measuring
module (IM)
System
interface
A2
1 3 5
A1
IN1
IN2
Liquid container
24 V
Basic unit (BU 2)
In+
Control station In–
Analog module (AM) Operator panel
Connecting cable
T1
- K1
S1
S0
2 4 6
N/L–
T2
OUT 1
1
Out+
Out–
Display
Motor current
K1
2 4 6
Pump
PE
U V W
T1
M
3~
J
Thermistor
Optional:
Laptop with
SIMOCODE ES
T2
Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example
SIMOCODE pro
1-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Recording, displaying and evaluating the measured values
The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
• pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring module
• analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS.
Any measured value can be outputted via the analog module, e.g. the effective motor current when a pointer instrument is connected.
Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the
SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-7
System Description
1.4
Check List for Selecting the Device Series
The following check list should help you decide on the best device series for
your requirements:
SIMOCODE pro
Requirement
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
✓
✓
1)
Monitoring of blocking, unbalance, phase
failure
✓
✓
1)
Current measuring, current limit monitoring,
overload protection
✓
✓
1)
Earth-fault monitoring via current measuring
module (internal)
✓
✓
1)
✓
✓
—
✓
1)
—
✓
2)
—
✓
3)
—
✓
3)
—
✓
3)
—
✓
2)
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)
with control functions for direct starters,
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)
Motor feeder with control function:
Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters – each also possible in combination with reversal of the
direction of rotation –, valves, positioners
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc.
(if necessary via an analog module)
Current measuring and voltage measuring
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage
Power management, implementing power
considerations (power, power factor), power
monitoring
More than 4 binary inputs required
(maximum 12)
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
1-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
Requirement
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
More than 3 relay outputs required
(maximum 7)
—
✓
2)
Earth-fault monitoring with a summation current transformer via an earth-fault module
—
✓
2)
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC
(max. 8)
—
✓
2)
—
✓
2)
—
✓
2)
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series (cont.)
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-9
System Description
1.5
Function Overview
1.5.1
Protecting Functions
For a more detailed description, see chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Electronic overload protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent
motor protection:
• overload protection
• phase unbalance
• phase failure.
Stall protection
See chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) make it also possible to connect thermistor
sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.
1.5.2
Monitoring Functions
For a more detailed description, see chapter 5 "Monitoring Functions".
Earth-fault monitoring
The basic units have
• Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible
fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring
module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which
are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
• External earth-fault monitoring by SIMOCODE pro V 1),5):
In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may
be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a summation current transformer instead of carrying out internal
earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to
create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation current transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated
with the summation current transformer.
Current limit monitoring
The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a
current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor bearing which is running more and more sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is
worn out.
SIMOCODE pro
1-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Voltage monitoring 2)
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring of a three-phase
current network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
• Monitoring for undervoltage:
Two-phase monitoring for limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a particular pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized.
• Monitoring for further availability:
Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further
availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses.
Temperature monitoring 1),3)
The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of implementing analog temperature monitoring, e.g. of the motor windings or the
bearings of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for
freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature
monitoring always takes place taking the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits in use into account.
Active power monitoring 2)
The shape of the active power curve of a motor shows its actual load. A load
which is too high leads to increased wear of the motor and as a result can,
in certain circumstances, lead to premature motor failure. An active power
which is too low can, for example, be a sign of no-load operation of the
motor. SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-phase active power monitoring for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen.
The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring 2)
Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the power factor
changes more frequently than either the motor current or the active power
does. For this reason, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for
distinguishing between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a tear in a drive
belt or a break in a drive shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase monitoring of the power factor (cos phi)
for undershooting freely selectable limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-11
System Description
Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups
SIMOCODE pro V can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a
motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they
were either running too long (wear) or they were stopped for too long a
period of time.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued
which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or
even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in
a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts
can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4)
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of measuring and monitoring other process variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect the pump against dry
operation, or the degree of pollution in a filter can be monitored using a differential pressure transducer. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off, or if the differential pressure overshoots a
specified value, the filter should be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding process variables for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. The
response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Phase sequence identification 2)
SIMOCODE pro offers the option of determining the direction of rotation of
a motor by identifying the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is
false, a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.
Monitoring measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1)
SIMOCODE pro is able to monitor every measured value in the system for
undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by using unrestricted
limit monitors.
See chapter 11.11 "Limit Monitor".
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
When using basic unit 2
When using basic unit 2 with a current or voltage measuring module
Additional temperature module required
Additional analog module required
Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.
SIMOCODE pro
1-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.5.3
Control Functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control
functions are available:
SIMOCODE
Control function
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Overload relays
✓
✓
1)
Direct starters
✓
✓
1)
Reversing starters
✓
✓
1)
Circuit breakers (MCCBs)
✓
✓
1)
Star-delta starters,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
—
✓
Dahlander,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
—
✓
Pole-changing switches,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
—
✓
Valves
—
✓
Positioners
—
✓
Soft starters,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
—
✓
1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary to select
the BU2 device version.
Table 1-2: Control functions
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
For a more detailed description of the individual control functions, see chapter 4 "Motor Control".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-13
System Description
1.5.4
Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
SIMOCODE
Service
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s
✓
✓
Automatic baud rate recognition
✓
✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services
(DPV1)
✓
✓
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y
link
✓
✓
Warnings according to DPV1
✓
✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP
—
✓
3UF50 compatibility mode
—
✓
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
For a detailed description, see chapter 12 "Communication".
1.5.5
Standard Functions
Standard functions are predefined functions which can be easily activated,
e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Standard function
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Number
Number
Test
2
2
Reset
3
3
Test position feedback (TPF)
1
1
External fault
4
6
Operational protection off (OPO)
—
1
Power failure monitoring (UVO)
—
1
Emergency start
1
1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS)
1
1
Timestamping
—
1
Table 1-4: Standard functions
For a detailed description, see chapter 10 "Standard Functions".
SIMOCODE pro
1-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.5.6
Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for
example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter
functions. Furthermore, every value in SIMOCODE pro can be monitored for
undershooting or overshooting selected limit values using limit monitors.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules
which can be parameterized freely:
SIMOCODE
Logic module
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Number
Number
Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output
3
6
Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output
—
2
Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs
—
1
Timers
2
4
Counters
2
4
Signal conditioners
2
4
Non-volatile elements
2
4
Flashing
3
3
Flickering
3
3
Limit monitor
—
4
Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
For a detailed description, see chapter 11 "Logic Modules".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-15
System Description
1.5.7
Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data
SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of detailed operating, service and diagnostic
data:
Operating data
• Motor switching state (on, off, right, slowly, quickly), derived from the current
flow in the main circuit; therefore no feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit
breakers and contactors is necessary
• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V
• Real power in W
2)
2)
• Apparent power in VA
• Power factor in %
2)
2)
• Phase unbalance in %
• Phase cycle
2)
• Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3 and maximum temperature in °C 1) 3)
• Actual analog signal value
1) 4)
• Time to tripping in s
• Heating up of the motor model in %
• Remaining motor cooling down time in s, etc.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for
maintaining relevant data:
• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable)
• Motor stop times, also resettable
• Number of motor starts, also resettable
• Number of permissible starts remaining
• Number of overload trippings, also resettable
• Internal comments stored in the device referring to the feeder, e.g. information regarding maintenance events, etc.
Diagnostic data
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault signals, also for further processing
in the device or in the control system
• Internal device error protocolling with time stamp
• Value of the last tripping current
• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on command), etc.
1) When using basic unit 2
2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) Additional temperature module required
4) Additional analog module required
SIMOCODE pro
1-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.6
Overview of System Components
Devices
SIMOCODE pro
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Operator panel (OP)
Installation in the cabinet door. Additional
control station and
display. With system
interface for connecting a PC
Current measuring modules (IM)
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Current measuring
with push-through
system. Basic unit can
be snapped open
Current measuring modules (IM)
10 A up to 100 A
Current measuring modules (IM)
20 A up to 200 A
Current measuring
with push-through
system or a rail connection system
Current measuring modules (IM)
63 A up to 630 A
Current measuring
with a rail connection
system
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) *
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
—
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) *
10 A up to 100 A
—
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) *
20 A up to 200 A
—
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) *
63 A up to 630 A
—
Mounting only next to
the basic unit, otherwise similar to the
current measuring
modules, also:
- voltage measuring
- power measurement
- power factor
(cos phi) measurement
- phase cycle
Table 1-6: System components, devices
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-17
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
Digital modules (DM)
24 V DC monostable
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monostable
24 V DC bistable
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable
—
Analog module (AM) *
—
Earth-fault module (EM) *
—
Temperature module (TM) *
—
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Additional binary
inputs and outputs.
Maximum 2 DMs possible
Additional inputting
and outputting as well
as monitoring of analog values
Max. 1 AM possible
For connecting a
3UL22 external summation current transformer for earth-fault
monitoring
Max. 1 EM possible
For monitoring temperature via additional
sensors
(PT100, PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84, NTC).
Max. 1 TM possible.
Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)
For a detailed description of the system components, see chapter 1.7 "Description of the System Components".
For dimensional drawings, see chapter C "Dimension Drawings".
For assembly information, see chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".
SIMOCODE pro
1-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit
Connectable
system components
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Application
Connecting cable in 4 different
lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to
2m
For connecting
system components
via system interfaces
System interface cover
For covering system
interfaces not in use
Memory module
For saving the device
parameters. In the
case of device replacement, existing parameters can be
transferred without a
PC
Addressing plug
For configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable
For connecting
SIMOCODE pro to a
PC
Door adapter
Only for leading out
the system interface
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Application
SIMOCODE ES Smart
Access via the system
interface on the
device
SIMOCODE ES Professional
with Object Manager
OM SIMOCODE pro
Access via the system
interface on the
device and PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE ES Graphic *)
Graphical parameterization per
"Drag&Drop"
Table 1-8: System components, software
*) Optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-19
System Description
1.7
Description of the System Components
1.7.1
Basic Units (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They
have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable terminals:
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
SIMOCODE pro C device series
Basic unit 2 (BU2)
SIMOCODE pro V device series
Figure 1-5: Basic units
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are
supported:
• overload relays
• direct starters and reversing starters
• circuit breaker activation.
Basic unit 2 (BU2)
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The
following motor control functions are supported:
• overload relays
• direct and reversing starters
• star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with
reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with superette Dahlander windings, also with reversal of
the direction of rotation
• slide control
• valve control
• circuit breaker control (MCCB)
• soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation.
SIMOCODE pro
1-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Basic unit 2 offers the following expansion options:
• increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of
22.5 mm width
• using a current/voltage measuring module instead of the current measuring
module used
• additional inputs and outputs if necessary.
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-21
System Description
1.7.2
Operator Panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control
centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C as well as with the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on
the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and makes the system interface
externally available.
It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For
this, the operator panel is equipped with
• 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely
• 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Operator panel
Device series
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-6: Operator panel
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion
module on the back of the system interface. The voltage is supplied by the
basic unit.
A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug
can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front
(with a cover for IP54).
Legend strip:
Legend strips for designating buttons 1 to 4 as well as LEDs 1 to 3 are
enclosed:
• Buttons 1 to 4:
6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable legend strip
• LEDs 1 to 3:
1 individually inscribable legend strip.
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4
0
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
LED 1
BUS
LED 2
GEN. FAULT
LED 3
Figure 1-7: Legend strip for operator panel buttons and LEDs
SIMOCODE pro
1-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Unused legend strips can be stored on the back of the operating panel:
Legend strip
Storage clips
Figure 1-8: Storage clips for legend strip
Memory module "park position":
The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it
on the back of the control panel.
In this case, the storage clips for the legend strip cannot be used.
Memory module
Figure 1-9: Memory module in the park position
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-23
System Description
1.7.3
Current Measuring Modules (IM)
Current measuring modules are used with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current
measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with
interposing transformers up to 820 A.
The following figure shows the different current measuring modules:
Current measuring modules
0.3A - 3A
2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A
Device series
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
10A - 100A
63A - 630A
Figure 1-10: Current measuring modules
The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to
100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. The current measuring
modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally,
they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments
which are integrated into the enclosure. The current measuring module up
to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.
SIMOCODE pro
1-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.7.4
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V
Device Series
The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/
voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules
can also
• monitor voltages up to 690 V
• evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi)
• monitor the phase cycle
The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modules:
Current/ voltage measuring modules
Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
0.3A - 3A
2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A
Device series
SIMOCODE pro V
10A - 100A
63A - 630A
Figure 1-11: Current/voltage measuring modules
The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic device via
a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be
fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the
standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Mounting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/
voltage measuring modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be mounted
separately next to the current/voltage measuring modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-25
System Description
Note
The use of a current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.
Current/voltage measuring modules have additional detachable terminals for
the evaluation or monitoring of performance variables which can be fed with
all three phase voltages of the main circuit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.7.5
Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
• digital modules (DM)
• analog module (AM)
• earth-fault module (EM)
• temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing)
and detachable terminals.
The following figure shows an expansion module:
Expansion module
Device series
SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-12: Expansion module
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number
of binary inputs and relay outputs on basic unit 2, if required.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Inputs
Supply
Outputs
4 inputs
24 V DC, external
2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs
110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs
24 V DC, external
4 inputs
110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
2 bistable relay outputs
Table 1-9: Versions of digital modules
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2. This
means that 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are
available. All versions listed here can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 relay outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-27
System Description
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off/
failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off/
failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the digital module inputs (see
chapter 7.4 "Digital Module Inputs".
Supplying the inputs: see also chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to
measure and monitor any process variable which can be mapped on to a 0/4
mA - 20-mA signal.
Typical applications are, for example, fill level monitoring for protecting
pumps from dry operation or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a
differential pressure transducer. In this case, the automation system has
free access to the measured processed variables. The analog output can, for
example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output.
• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2
• 2 analog inputs for detecting signals from 0/4-mA - 20-mA.
Both inputs are set to either 0 to 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA
• 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
Earth-fault module (EM)
In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may
be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22 summation current transformer instead of carrying out
earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, 1 A can be evaluated
with the summation current transformer.
In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device
series, SIMOCODE pro V can therefore be expanded by a supplementary,
external and more precise earth-fault monitoring system.
An additional input for connecting a summation current transformer can be
added to basic unit 2 via the earth-fault module.
• 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2.
Note
The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
SIMOCODE pro
1-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
Temperature module (TM)
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring
system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or threewire systems) can be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measuring circuits evaluated as well as the highest temperature in all the sensor
measuring circuits determined.
The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process, can be
monitored and are also available for a main automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor winding,
bearings, coolant and gear oil temperature.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100
and PT1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.
Attention
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
• 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2
• 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems
Note
The use of a temperature module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-29
System Description
1.7.6
Accessories
The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device
series:
PC cable
Addressing plug
Device series
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Memory module
Door adapter
Connecting cable
System interface
cover
Figure 1-13: Accessories
PC cable
for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface
of a basic unit via its serial interface.
Memory module
for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the
entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replacement (see chapter 14.3.3 "Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components").
Addressing plug
for the "hardware" transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC/programming device.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:
Please see chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address".
Connecting cable
in different lengths and various versions (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m,
0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). They are required for connecting the individual
basic units with their current measuring modules and, if necessary, with
their expansion modules or operator panels. The total length of all the connecting cables should not exceed pro System 3 m!
Door adapter
for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization.
System interface cover
to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal operation, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.
SIMOCODE pro
1-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.7.7
Software
SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving
parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in 2 versions:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device
(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface
on the device (point to point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via
PROFIBUS DP and/or via the system interface on the device. You can find a
demo and the latest updates on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads.
SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It extends the user
interface by a graphics editor and as a result allows very ergonomic and
user-friendly parameterization per "Drag & Drop". The inputs and outputs
from function blocks can be graphically linked and the parameters set. The
device parameterization can be graphically documented.
Note
Prerequisite for the installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an installed version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + service pack 1 or
SIMOCODE ES Professional + service pack 1 on the PC/programming
device.
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and
the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device,
SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configuration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made possible.
PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro
With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected
easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains
• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (symbols and faceplate)
Attention
Observe the respective system versions!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-31
System Description
GSD File
for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system
(automation system). You will find the current english version on the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de.
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system.
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter
is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files
(3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
1-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
System Description
1.8
Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro
1.8.1
Function Blocks
Characteristics
In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs.
The following table shows the possible input and output types of the internal functions blocks from SIMOCODE pro:
Input
Symbol
Example
Plugs
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic unit can have binary
plugs. These are connected via software to binary
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog
plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.
Screw terminals
Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU input". Control devices and auxiliary switches are
usually connected there.
Control data
from
PROFIBUS DP
DP
From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function
block "Cyclic control".
Output
Sockets
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic devices can have binary
sockets. These are assigned via software to binary
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic devices can have analog
sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw terminals
Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU output". Contactors, e.g., are connected there.
Signaling data
to
PROFIBUS DP
DP
From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function
block "cyclic signaling data".
Binary
connecting
blocks
Internal binary signals (binary sockets) which are not
assigned to a function block (fault, status, other), e.g.
"Status - device o.k." (in the graphics editor).
Analog
connecting
blocks
Internal analog signals (analog sockets) which are not
assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase unbalance"
(in the graphics editor).
Table 1-10: Input and output types of the internal function blocks from SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1-33
System Description
Schematic of principle structural configuration
The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of
SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and the internal
function blocks:
BU
external
Inputs
(terminals)
BU internal
Sockets
Plugs
Sockets
Function block A
BU inputs
BU outputs
1
1
IN1
2
IN2
Standard function
OUT1
2
Function block C
3
IN3
Outputs
(terminals)
Plugs
4
IN4
3
OUT2
4
OUT3
Standard function
Function block B
Cyclic
control
Cyclic
signaling
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.0
From the
DP
Master DP
Control function
Bit 0.1
Function block D
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.2
To the DP
Master
DP
Logic function
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP
Figure 1-14: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE-pro
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic
unit. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by
the user according to his respective application. 1)
Attention
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not
yet been parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!1)
1) If you select and load a preset application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. the
reversing starter, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created
in the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring
a Reversing Starter
2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set
as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have
to be set.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners
• configurators
• mechanics
• electricians
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1 "System Description")
• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.1
Introduction and Target of the Example
Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-bystep how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter
will be equipped with
• a local control station
• and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP
The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.
The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Target of the example
This example is intended to
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing
starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you easily implement other applications
Important steps
The two important steps with SIMOCODE pro are always:
• implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching devices and control and signaling devices)
• implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function
blocks), with control and analysis of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE wiring).
Conditions
• Load feeder/motor present
• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit of the reversing circuit including the current measuring module is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be
led through the push-through system openings of the current measuring
module.
• PC/programming device is present
• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings.
In chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings" you will learn
how to implement the basic factory default settings.
SIMOCODE pro
2-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.2
Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control
Station
Necessary components
The following table shows the components that are required for
this example:
Item
Ordering data
Order number
1
SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)
3UF7000-1AU00-0
(3UF7010-1AU00-0)
2
Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A
3UF7100-1AA00-0
3
Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and
the current measuring module, depending on the
length
3UF793.-1AA00-0
4
"SIMOCODE ES Smart" software for parameterization
via the system interface or
"SIMOCODE ES Professional" software
for parameterization via the PROFIBUS DP and system interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager possible
3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0
5
PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ programming device
3UF7940-0AU00-0
6
PROFIBUS DP cable
(3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0
Table 2-1: Components needed for the example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-3
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:
Control circuit
Main circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
F11
S0
2 4 6
3 push-through
system openings
Current Measuring
module (IM)
System
interface
A1
Connecting cable
A2
S1
S2
IN1
IN2
IN3
Basic unit (BU)
System
interface
OUT1
1 3 5
- K1
- K2
2 4 6
PE
1 3 5
N/L–
24 V
K1
OUT2 1
K2
2 4 6
U V W
M
3~
J
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A
CLASS 10
Optional: thermistor
Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a local control station for the commands
• LEFT
• OFF
• RIGHT.
Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.
Standard reversing starter
Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro
L1/L+
L1/L+
S1
Necessary interlocks
and links
F11
S0
A1
S0
K1
S2
A2
S2
S1
IN1
IN2
IN3 24 V
K2
Basic unit (BU)
K2
K1
OUT1
N/L–
K1
S0: "LEFT" button
S1: "OFF" button
S2: "RIGHT" button
K2
N/L–
K1
OUT2
1
K2
K1: Contactor clockwise rotation
K2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation
Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the
basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-5
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.3
Parameterization
The basics of parameterization
After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils connected, current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), the second step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro.
For this you need to know the following points:
Point
Description
1
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations and control functions with motor protection.
2
Function blocks have names.
3
Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the type of control function and the
set current for the overload protection.
4
Function blocks have plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.
5
You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality:
• connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets
(i.e put the plugs in the sockets)
• if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current,
type of control function
6
The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and
labeled as plugs:
7
The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and
labelled as sockets:
8
Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected
as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not activated.
Table 2-2: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter
Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Linking function blocks
In the example, this means the following:
• You choose the "reversing starter" control function to implement all interlocks
and links in the basic device for the reversing starter.
• You determine the set current Ie for the motor protection. In this case, the
set current corresponds to the motor rated current, here 3 A.
• The "BU - outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"protecting/controlling" function block via the software. This means
– connect "BU - output 1" to the socket "Contactor control QE1" (right)
– connect "BU - output 2" to the socket "Contactor control QE2" (left).
• the plugs of the "protecting/controlling" function block must be connected to
the sockets of the "BU - inputs" function block via the software. This means
– connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket "BU - input 1"
– connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket "BU - input 2"
– connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket "BU - input 3".
SIMOCODE pro
• Connect
• Choose a reversing starter
• Determine Ie
digital inputs
• Connect
relay outputs
BU - inputs
BU - outputs
1
ON<
2
OFF
3
ON>
Protecting/controlling QE1
1
QE2
2
Ie = 3 A
Local control station [LC]
Right
Left
Contactor controls
Figure 2-3: Schematic of an example of parameterization
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized
control function. See chapter 4.3 "Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp
Controls and Status Signal for the Control Functions".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-7
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.
2
Choose the control function "reversing starter" as the application. When you
select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
3
Under "Device configuration", select either SIMOCODE pro C or
SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.
4
Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/unbalance/
blocking . Set the set current Ie1 to 3A.
5
Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the
following settings:
• Contactor control > Contactor control QE1.
• Contactor control > Contactor control QE2.
BU - inputs
The relay outputs are connected Protecting/controlling
QE1
to the contactor controls.
1
QE2
2
Note
By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
6
Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check
the following settings:
• local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1
• local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2
• local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3
The control station
BU - outputs
Protecting/controlling is now connected "locally" with
1
ON<
2
OFF
3
ON>
the binary inputs of the basic unit.
Check if the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for the operating mode "local2" are
set.
7
Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ programming device using Switchgear > Save.
Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
2-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning
After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device.
2
Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the basic unit with the PC cable.
3
Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4
Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using
Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5
After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the
message "Download to the switchgear finished successfully".
Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Attention
Switching between "right" and "left" is only possible via "OFF" and after expiration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.
Configuration with local control station is finished
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding buttons are pushed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-9
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.4
Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station
via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You have the option of
using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote
control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as
well as via PLC/ DCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP
address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP
slave on the PROFIBUS DP.
Conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The motor is switched off
• The supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The "Device" LED
must light up green
• The basic unit is connected to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP interface is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)
• You have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
First set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.
The following options are available:
• via the addressing plug
• via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
2-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2
Start SIMOCODE ES.
3
Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.
4
Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5
Open the dialog Device parameters > Bus parameters.
6
Select the DP address.
7
Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the
change of the address.
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"1" in the "ON position".
2
If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface.
3
Plug the addressing plug in the system interface.
The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4
Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
5
Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2-11
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
Additional internal components of the basic unit
The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external components are connected and the required internal connections have been carried out.
The following additional internal components that are already connected as
factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required:
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and
"RIGHT"
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local)
and the PLC/DCS (remotely)
– Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active
– Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug S1) are already
connected with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic signaling data from
PROFIBUS DP. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under
Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.
SIMOCODEpro
BU - outputs
Control stations
BU - inputs
1
LEFT
2
3
OFF
QE1
QE2
1
Right
2
Left
RIGHT
PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic
control
LEFT
Status
ON<
OFF
OFF
RIGHT
ON>
Bit0.0
Bit0.1
DP
Bit0.2
Bit0.0
Cyclic
signaling
Bit0.1
Bit0.2
DP
Bit0.5
S1
Figure 2-4: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example
All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown.
The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under
Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data
Configuration with PLC/DCS [DP] control station is finished
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on motor protection.
Motor protection includes
• overload protection
• unbalance protection
• stall protection
• thermistor protection.
The motor protection operates alongside the motor control "at a higher level
in the background". All parameters of the motor protection are explained.
They can be active or non-active depending on the chosen control function.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Motor protection.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-1
Motor Protection
3.1
Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection", "Stall protection" and "Thermistor protection" are explained in
Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Schematic diagram
The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. protecting" function block
("Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection") with
optional parameter settings and signals.
Protection/Control
Extended protection
QE1
Set current Is1
Switching
off
Set current Is2
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Class 5, 10, ... 40
Response at Trip Level
see
Tab. 3-1
Signal/Warning/Fault:
- Overload
Extended parameters:
- Overload + Phase loss
Reset
Current
from current
measuring
- Prewarn Overload
- Cool Time active
Type of Load
- Pause active
Pause time
Cooling Down Period
- Time to trip(analog)
Response at Pre-Warning Level
see
Tab. 3-1
- Heating up motor model (analog)
- Remain. cooling down time (analog)
Unbalance Protection
- Last tripping current (analog)
see
Level
Tab. 3-1
- Unbalance
Stalled Rotor
Level
see
- Stalled Rotor
Tab. 3-1
Figure 3-1: "Ext. protection" function block (overload protection, unbalance protection and stall
protection)
SIMOCODE pro
3-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall
protection"
Response
Disabled
At pre-warning At trip level
level
At "asymmety" level
At "stall protection" level
X
X
Signalling
X
Warning
X (d)
-
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
-
0 - 25.5 s
0 - 25.5 s
Tripping
Delay
X
X (d)
X
X
X
X
X (d)
X
Table 3-1: Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection"
See also "Table of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
Attention
Deactivate the unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES if the type of load is
set for 1-phase!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-3
Motor Protection
3.2
Overload Protection
Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging
from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch-off time can be adjusted very
precisely to the power-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be
better used to capacity. The "Heating up the motor model" value and the interval up to the overload tripping are also calculated and can be put at the disposal of the control system. After an overload tripping, the remaining cooling down time is displayed. The motor current at the point of overload tripping is stored.
Set current Is1
The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Is1. This value is
listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the overload tripping characteristic curve. ls2 must always be set higher than ls1.
Range: depends on the desired current module
Set current Is1:
0.3 A up to
3A
2.4 A up to
25 A
10 A
up to
100 A
20 A
up to
200 A
63 A
up to
630 A
Set current Is2
The set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to
also guarantee suitable overload protection for the higher speed as well.
Range: depends on the selected current module
Set current Is2:
0.3 A up to
3A
2.4 A up to
25 A
10 A
up to
100 A
20 A
up to
200 A
63 A
up to
630 A
Attention
Make sure that both motor currents are within the setting range of the current module in use. Otherwise, you should use an additional 3UF18 current
transformer.
SIMOCODE pro
3-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which
SIMOCODE pro must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Is (motor protection according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups >
"Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced
(derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used.
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:
1,15
Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads
Range:
Class:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-5
Motor Protection
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 2-pole load:
0,85
Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load
Range:
Class:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
Response in case of overload
The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of
overload:
Further information: see "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to "tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
3-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
Cooling down period
The cooling down period is the specified time after which an overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes. The thermal memory (motor
model - see below) is deleted after the cooling down period expires.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time correspondingly
extend the specified time.
Range:
Cooling down period:
60 up to 6553.5 seconds
Heating up the motor model (thermal memory)
At a motor rated current (Is) of 100 %, the "heating up the motor model" value
is 87 % (1/1.15 x 100 %) in a steady state and 100 % at the moment of overload tripping.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of
overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in
SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, frequent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-7
Motor Protection
The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a
pause time:
Motor
ON
OFF
t
Thermal memory (Motor model)
Without pause time
100%
Trip level
Overload tripping
t
With pause time
100%
Trip level
No overload tripping
t
Pause time
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Attention
The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this
load!
Pause time:
0 up to 6553.5 seconds
Type of load
You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a
3-phase load.
With a 1-phase load, the following measures should be carried out:
• The internal earth-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must be
deactivated
• Only one of the two cables should be feed through a push-through system
opening in the current module.
The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Load type:
1-phase, 3-phase
SIMOCODE pro
3-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
Delay pre-warning
The "delay" parameter is used to determine the interval during which the
pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no
reaction.
In case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning is already
issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults are acknowledged automatically
• if the cooling down period has expired
• if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to
specification.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the errors must be acknowledged
by a reset signal:
• "Reset" button on the basic unit
• "Reset" button on the operator panel
• "Reset" standard functions.
For this reason, the "Reset - input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus.
Reset:
Manual, Auto
Warning
The "Auto reset" mode of operation may not be used in applications in which
an unexpected restart of the motor can lead to damage to persons or
objects.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-9
Motor Protection
3.3
Unblance Protection
Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the
control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an
adjustable level is exceeded. If the phase unbalance is greater than 50 %,
a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors
increases with asymmetrical conditions.
Level
The limit of the unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when overshot is set here.
Level:
0 to 100%
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase
unbalance:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The unbalance limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is
no reaction.
SIMOCODE pro
3-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
3.4
Stall Protection
Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stall limit (current limit), a
definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro.
For example, the motor can be set to tripped quickly independently of the
overload protection. The stall protection is only active after the parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The stall
protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and mechanical load as well as premature deterioration.
Level
After exceeding the stall limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the specified response.
Range:
Level:
0 up to 1020 % of Is
Response
Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking
limit is exceeded:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The "Delay" parameter is used to specify the time interval. The stall level
must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired
response. Otherwise there is no reaction.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-11
Motor Protection
3.5
Thermistor Protection
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the
motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic
unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2).
Thermistor protection is used for:
• motors with high switching frequencies
• converter operation
• intermittent operation and/or during braking
• a restricted air supply
• speeds that are lower than the rated speed
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings
of the motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve
The resistance of the thermistors increases very rapidly when the limit temperature is reached.
R
QE1
Thermistor
Tripping
QE2
QE3
υ
QE4
T1
Thermistor
input
BU
Response at trip level
see
Tab. 3-2
QE5
Signal
- Thermistor trip level
T2
Response to sensor fault
see
Tab. 3-2
- Thermistor short circuit
- Thermistor open circuit
Figure 3-5: Thermistor (thermistor protection) function block
Response
• Overtemperature:
Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the temperature exceeds the trip level.
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
3-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Protection
• Sensor fault(sensor circuit error):
Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is
a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.
Response
Trip level
Sensor fault
Disabled
-
X
Signaling
X
X
Warning
X
X
Tripping
X
X
Table 3-2: "Thermistor protection, binary" response
See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3-13
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on
• control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The
following related topics are explained:
– how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together,
– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through to the
control function
• control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through from the
control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
– which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• electrical drive engineering
• motor protection.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameter > Motor control.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-1
Motor Control
4.1
Control stations
4.1.1
Description
Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to
the motor. The "control stations" function module is used for the management,
switching and prioritization of the various control stations. SIMOCODE pro can
manage up to four different control stations in parallel. Depending on the
control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted
from each control station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via
pushbutton.
• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Operator Panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Control commands can be e.g:
– motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter
– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter
– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit
The plugs of the "control stations function block" must be connected to
arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station.
ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) available
There are up to 5 plugs (plug
on the function block per control station. The number of active plugs
depends on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example,
only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Control stations
• Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "control
stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the
function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs, basic unit
inputs, DM - inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Attention
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that
SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in
the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.
Pushbutton
BU - Inputs
ON <<
1
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Local
ON <
Enables
ON
2
OFF
3
OFF
ON >
4
ON >>
ON <<
PLC/DCS [DP]
Enables
ON
Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control
• Control station - PLC/DCS
This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the
automation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of
PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP
bits (cyclic control) for the control commands to take effect.
ON >>
Cycl. receive
Bit 0.0
ON <<
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON <
PLC
Number:16
DP
ON
OFF
OFF
ON >
Bit 1.7
Enables
ON >>
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
Enables
Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/DCS
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-3
Motor Control
• Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an
arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the
acyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take
effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. The inputs (plugs) of the "control
stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets, normally the
function blocks for the acyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (acyclic receive) for the
commands to take effect.
Acycl. receive
Bit 0.0
PC
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
ON <
DP
Number: 16
ON
OFF
OFF
ON >
Bit 1.7
Enables
ON >>
<>/<<>>
Op. Panel [OP]
Enables
Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC
• Control station - operator panel
This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door. The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be
connected to arbitrary sockets (normally with the function block for the
buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take
effect.
Attention
Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder,
one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with
2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".
Attention
If the SIMOCODE ES PC Software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands
automatically take effect via the control station operator panel (OP) and
must also be enabled here if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
4-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
OP buttons
Operator
panel
<>/<<>>
Op. panel [OP]
ON <
Enables
ON
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >>
Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel
4.1.2
Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors
Modes of operation
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different modes of operation you can switch between:
• Local 1
• Local 2
• Local 3
• Remote/Automatic: In this mode of operation, the communication must be
carried out via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control
station (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also
mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of
operation are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two
control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every
mode of operation, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF
commands" are to be used. The modes of operation are so controlled that
only one mode of operation is active at any one time.
Example: There are three modes of operation in a system:
Mode of operation
Description
Key-operated switch
operation,
e.g. local 1
Only local control entries are admissible!
All other control stations are locked.
Manual operation,
e.g. local 3
Only operator panel control commands and local control
commands can be issued.
Remote operation,
e.g. remote/automatic
Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only
OFF commands are permitted.
Table 4-1: Modes of operation
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes
of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the
bus. The key-operated switching operation has priority over all other modes
of operation.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-5
Motor Control
Mode selectors
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the modes of
operation "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and
S2 plugs must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Mode of operation
Input
Local 1
Local 2
Local 3
Remote/
Automatic
S1
0
0
1
1
S2
0
1
0
1
Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2
The different modes of operation for enabling the control stations can be
used to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations
• Local
• PLC/DCS [DP]
• PC [DPV1]
• Operator panel (OP)
Only the following are active:
• the mode of operation set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "control stations"
function block
• the enables selected there.
Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:
S1
0
1
1
1
0
S2
0
1
0
1
0
Manual
operation
Remote
operation
Key-op.
switch
Local 1
Remote
operation
Remote
Local 3
0
Remote
Key-op.
switch
Local 1
Time t
Fig. 4-5: Example - modes of operation
SIMOCODE pro
4-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.1.3
Enables and Enabled Control Command
Enables
Enables for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be activated,
are assigned to each mode of operation for every single control station. This
means that depending on the mode of operation, it can be specified for each
control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on and
off. The corresponding checkbox
is activated in the "Control stations"
dialog in SIMOCODE ES.
Enables and enabled control command schematic
The following schematic shows the "control stations" function block and the
modes of operation:
Control stations
Mode selectors
S1
0
S2
ON <<
0
1
1
Activation of enables for
control commands "ON" and
"OFF" in SIMOCODE ES
0
1
1
0
Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote
Local
ON <
Enables
ON
Enabled
OFF
Not enabled
OFF
ON >
ON >>
ON <<
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON <
Enables
ON
To the control function
"Protecting/Controlling"
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON <<
ON >>
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
ON <
Enables
ON
Enabled
control
command
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >>
<>/<<>>
Op. panel[OP]
ON <
Enables
ON
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >>
Fig. 4-6: Function block "control stations"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-7
Motor Control
Example for operator enable
The following diagram shows an example of operator enable for the
"local 2" mode of operation, "Dahlander with reversal of direction of rotation"
control function:
Control command "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)"
enabled
Control command "OFF" enabled
To the control function
"Protecting/Controlling"
Fig. 4-7: Example for operator enable
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "local 2"
mode of operation via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic
unit and the digital module.
SIMOCODE pro
4-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.1.4
Control Station Settings
Control stations
LC
ON <<
ON <
Description
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
,
(arbitrary sockets
but usually device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON <<
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
,
(arbitrary sockets
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PC [DPV1]
ON <<
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
,
(arbitrary sockets
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Operator panel (OP)
<>/<<>>
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
,
(arbitrary sockets
but usually operator panel pushbuttons)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Mode selectors
S1
S1
For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1,
local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 4-3: Control station settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-9
Motor Control
4.2
Control Functions
4.2.1
Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for
controlling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
• monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows in the main circuit
without the ON command)
• monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON
command)
• monitoring the ON status
• switching off in case of a fault.
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses F (feedback) ON, which
is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit via the
current measuring modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
• Plugs
for
– control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets. From there,
control commands come from the different control stations. The
number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For
example, with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON>" and "OFF" are
active.
• Auxiliary control inputs (plug
), e.g. Feedback ON
• Sockets
for
– contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls
depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are
usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling
the contactor coils.
– displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of statuses depends on
the control function chosen.
– statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>". The number of statuses
depends on the control function chosen.
– faults, e.g. "Fault - feedback (F) ON", "Fault - antivalence".
• Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function
• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor
protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when
activated via the control functions. For a more detailed description, see
chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Control function schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the control
function ("Protecting/controlling" function block):
Plugs of the control commands are usually
connected with the "Enabled control
command" sockets
Control commands
Controlstations
Contactor controls
QE1
ON <<
ON <<
Protecting/controlling
ON <
ON <
Control function
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >
QE4
ON >>
ON >>
QE5
QE2
QE3
(motor protection**)
Enabled
control command
Aux. control inputs *
*) Abbreviations
F ON
Feedback ON
Settings
•Operating Mode
•Control Commands
•Aux. Control Inputs
•Timings
•Star-delta
QLE<<
QLE<
QLA
F ON
QLE>
FC
QLE>>
FO
QLS
TC
TO
ON <<
(ON<<)
(ON<)
(OFF)
(ON>)
(ON>>)
(Fault)
Status signals
e.g. for PROFIBUS DP
ON <
FC
Feedback CLOSE
FO
Feedback OPEN
TC
Torque CLOSE
ON >
TO
Torque OPEN
ON >>
**) See also chapter 3 "Motor
Protection"
Displays (lamp
control)
OFF
Positioner OPEN
Positioner CLOSE
Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Lamp control and status signals:
The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status signals or the QL lamp
control. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control
input "F ON".
Feeder status feedback:
• Status signals, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automations system and signal the status of the feeder
there.
• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a
signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp.
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the displays can show a different
response (e.g. flashing).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-11
Motor Control
• The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a
2 Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the
relay outputs
– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s
Extent and application
Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function
pro C (BU1)
pro V(GG2)
Overload relay
✓
✓
Direct starter
✓
✓
Reversing starter
✓
✓
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
✓
✓
Star-delta starter
—
✓
Star-delta reversing starter
—
✓
Dahlander starter
—
✓
Dahlander reversing starter
—
✓
Pole-changing switch
—
✓
Pole-changing reversing switch
—
✓
Solenoid valve
—
✓
Positioner 1 to positioner 5
—
✓
Soft starter
—
✓
Soft starter with reversing contactor
—
✓
Table 4-4: Control functions
SIMOCODE pro
4-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.2
General Settings and Definitions
Parameter
Parameter
Description
F ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket
, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket) as factory
default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for
signaling. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is
signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<,
- ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current flowing" means: the
motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not
required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and
the "Status - OFF" signal
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated:
The control command on the corresponding input of the control
stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be
revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding
control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is
no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in
locking mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained
command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON<,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as
long as there is a "high signal".
Save switching
command
• Deactivated:
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. This
setting is usually used and is preset.
• Activated:
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be canceled at any time with "OFF".
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (e.g. heating):
Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during
switching, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the
start message for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Switch off"
functions is not hidden.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-13
Motor Control
Parameter
Description
Feedback time
SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via
F ON (Feedback ON).
If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching
command - the Fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder.
The default value is 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults"
for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously
controls if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set
feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued,
fault message "Fault - feedback (F) ON" is issued. The contactor
controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE continuously controls
if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time
without the "OFF" control command being issued, a fault message
"Fault - feedback (F) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are
deactivated.
Execution time
SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/
switching off must be completed within this time period.
The default value is 1.0 s. After an "ON" control command has been
issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main
circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message
"Fault - execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro
deactivates the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the
execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - execution
OFF command" will be issued. The contactor controls can only be
connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking time
SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
interlocking time.
Pause time
In the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions,
switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with
the time configured.
In the "Star/Delta" control function, the pause time extends the
time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the
delta contactor by the time configured.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
4-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
QE
Switch ON
1
ON
Switch OFF
OFF
OFF
0
Voltage failure,
e.g. pulsating current conditions
F ON
1
OFF
0
Az
Rz
Az
Rz
Az: Execution time
Rz: Feedback time
Fig. 4-9: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
There is also:
• a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
• a flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
• the "Status - general fault" signal
• the corresponding signaling bit of the fault.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-15
Motor Control
4.2.3
"Overload Relay" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic
overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the
load. The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g.
ON>, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
signal of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of
overload.
Schematic
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE3
Overload relay
Motor protection
Displays
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
Load type
QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-10: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2
"General Settings and Definitions".
Overload relay
Description
F ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when
the overload is tripped (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
SIMOCODE pro
4-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.4
"Direct Starter" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Direct starter
OFF
ON
Motor protection
Inching mode
ON >
Displayas(lamps)
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
QLE>
Execution time
(OFF)
(ON)
F ON*
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-11: Schematic of the "direct starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-17
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2
"General Settings and Definitions".
Direct starters
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.5
"Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e.
forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e.
backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• via the OFF control command
• directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-19
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Reversing starter
ON <
OFF
ON >
Motor protection
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
Displays
QLE<
(ON <)
QLA
Feedback time
F ON*
Left
Inching mode
Save switching
command
Load type
Aux. control inputs
Right
QLE>
Execution time
Interlocking time
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Interlocking time
Extended controlling
active
Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "reversing starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
4-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Reversing starter
Description
ON <
ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with optional socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command, clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can select between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-21
Motor Control
4.2.6
"MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and
OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON>" activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• Stop with "OFF" activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• With "Reset", the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).
The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the
"counter impulse" is set.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"ON connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"OFF connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch
(HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of
the circuit breaker, to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard
function.
SIMOCODE pro
4-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Circuit breaker
Motor protection
Contactor controls
QE1
400 ms.
ON
QE2
400 ms.
OFF
OFF
Inching mode
ON >
Displays
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
Auxiliary switch
QLE>
Execution time
QLS
(OFF)
(ON)
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Circuit breaker
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection always with
, (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker
socket
is connected to)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit
breaker. Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-23
Motor Control
4.2.7
"Star-delta Starter" Control Function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid
overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the
motor first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.
Control commands
• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2
and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected.
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent with decreasing current below the threshold (I < 90% Ie).
• Time-dependent according to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time
for star operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below
this threshold.
Safety instructions
Attention
It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of
the basic unit.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is
non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
SIMOCODE pro
4-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the interval is longer.
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Star-delta starter
OFF
Motor protection
Inching mode
QE2
QE3
ON >
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Network contactor
Displays
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
QLE>
Execution time
(OFF)
(ON)
F ON*
Switching interval
Max. time for
star operation
Transformer
mounted
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
Switching interval
*Feedback ON
Extended controlling
active
Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-25
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Star-delta starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval
Range: 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
Max. time for
star operation
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Transformer
mounted 1)
The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
1) Attention
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
4-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.8
"Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control
Function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of
rotation in star delta operation.
Control commands
• Clockwise rotation: start with "ON>" first activates the QE1 (star contactor)
contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control
(network contactor, clockwise rotation)
• Counter-clockwise rotation: start with "ON<" first activates the QE1 (star
contactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4
contactor control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets. The inputs (plugs) must be connected
to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to
be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie).
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time for star
operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this
threshold.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Start-up is always in star mode.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-27
Motor Control
Safety instructions
Note
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay
outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control
function.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur.
For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the interval is longer.
SIMOCODE pro
4-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Star-delta starter with
reversal of the
direction of rotation
Motor protection
Inching mode
Save switching
command
Load type
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
Displays
QLE<
QLA
Execution time
QLE>
Interlocking time
QLS
Switching time
Max. time for
star operation
Transformer
mounted
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Right - network contactor
Save switching
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
Extended controlling
active
Interlocking time
active
Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" function with reversal of the direction of rotation
("Protecting/controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-29
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Star-delta starter
with reversal of
the direction of
rotation
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
,
ON <
ON< control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
Feedback ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Interlocking time
Transformer mounted
Maximum time for Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
star operation
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Transformer
mounted 1)
The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching
depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/
current measuring module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings with reversal of the direction of rotation
1) Attention
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
4-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.9
"Dahlander" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
• Slow: start with "ON>" first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow)
• Fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(network contactor, fast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed if the signal when the signal "Feedback
ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from
"fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "fast" speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "slow" speed.
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-31
Motor Control
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3
A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see
chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Dahlander
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Motor protection
Inching mode
Save switching
command
QE2
QE3
Fast
Slow
Fast - star contactor
Displays
Load type
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
Execution time
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLE>>
Switching interval
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
Extended controlling
active
Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
4-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Dahlander
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command (slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >>
ON>> control command (fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-33
Motor Control
4.2.10
"Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with "ON>" first activates QE2 the contactor control (rightslow).
• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (faststar contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(right-fast)
• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star
contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (leftfast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".
Switching the speed
when the signal "Feedback ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off)
AND when changing from "fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has
expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro
4-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Safety information
Note
You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3
A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see
chapter 3.4 "Stall Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-35
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/Controlling
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Dahlander with
reversal of the
direction of rotation
Motor protection
Inching mode
Save switching
command
Load type
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
QE3
Right - slow
Fast - star contactor
QE4
Left - slow
QE5
Left - fast
Feedback time
Displays
QLE<<
Execution time
QLE<
Interlocking time
Switching interval
Right - fast
QLA
QLE>
QLE>>
QLS
(ON <<)
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
Extended controlling
active
Interlocking time
active
Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" control function
("Controlling/protecting" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
4-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Dahlander with
reversal of the
direction of
rotation
Description
ON <<
ON<< control command (left, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
ON <
ON< control command (left, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF<" socket)
ON >
ON> control command (right, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >>
ON>> control command (right, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Save switching
command
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Load type
You can choose between
Motor
Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Switching interval
Range 0 to - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-37
Motor Control
4.2.11
"Pole-changing Switch" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator
windings in two speed levels (fast and slow).
Control commands
• Slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (slow).
• Fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor control (fast).
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no
longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" ->
"slow" after the switching interval has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters
(e.g. 3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose
secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the
range 0.3 - 3 A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information
see chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/Controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Pole changing switch
QE2
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Motor protection
Fast
Slow
Inching mode
Save switching
command
Displays
Load type
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
Execution time
QLA
QLE>
QLE>>
Switching interval
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
Extended controlling
active
Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function
block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
pole-changing
switch
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command (slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >>
ON>> control command (fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-39
Motor Control
pole-changing
switch
Description
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval
Range: 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
4-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.12
"Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control
Function
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow)
• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor activation (rightfast)
• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no
longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" ->
"slow" after the switching interval has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-41
Motor Control
Switching interval
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds "fast" and "slow"
from switching on at the same time. The "switching interval" parameter is
used to delay switching from "fast" to "slow" to give the motor enough time
to run down.
Safety information
Note
At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current Measuring module with the range 0.3
- 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary
currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter
3.2 "Overload Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Pole-changing switch with
reversal of the
QE2
direction of rotation
Motor protection
Right - slow
Inching mode
Save switching
command
QE4
Left - slow
QE5
Left - fast
Load type
F ON*
Right - fast
Feedback time
Displays
QLE<<
Execution time
QLE<
Interlocking time
QLA
Switching interval
QLE>
QLE>>
QLS
(ON <<)
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Pause time active
Extended controlling
Interlocking time active
Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" with reversal of the direction of rotation
control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-43
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Pole-changing
switch with
reversal of the
direction of
rotation
Description
ON <<
ON<< control command (left, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
ON <
ON< control command (left, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command (right, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >>
ON>> control command (right, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
Feedback ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Switching interval
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.13
"Valve" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
With the control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE", the valve is brought into
the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE pro must be informed via
corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has
been reached.
Control commands
• Open: start with "ON>" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• Close: stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and
puts the valve into the "close" position.
Safety information
Attention
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module
is not necessary.
Attention
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the valve
is immediately switched OFF via the fault message
"Fault double 1" (="close")
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the valve is switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault"
(= "Close").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-45
Motor Control
Schematic"
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
Valve
OFF
Open
Inching mode
ON >
Displays
QLA
QLE>
Aux. control inputs
F ON *
Execution time
QLS
FC
(CLOSE)
(OPEN)
(Fault)
Status
FO
* Abbreviations
OFF
FC
Feedback CLOSE
FO
Feedback OPEN
ON >
Extended controlling
FC
FO
Fig. 4-20: Schematic of "valve" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Valve
Description
OFF
OFF control command (close)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON>
ON control command (open)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Execution time
Time until the end position is reached.
Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-16: Valve control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
4.2.14
"Positioner" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function.
The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the
"OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit
switch (1-active) or torque switch (0-active).
SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the limit switch/
torque switches via its inputs.
Control commands
• Open: start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End position
OPEN" (feedback open) is reached.
• Close: start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End position
CLOSE" (feedback close) is reached.
• Stop: with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The drive remains stopped in that position.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Function schematic
TO
Torque switch
TC
Motor shaft with springs
at the beginning and end
OPEN
CLOSE
FO
FC
Limit switch
Positioner
Gear
OPEN
CLOSE
Fig. 4-21: Function schematic of the torque switch and the limit switch when controlling
positioners
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-47
Motor Control
Switching the direction of travel
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Feedback ON" is
no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time
has expired.
• Via the OFF control command.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".
Attention
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated
limit switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected. In this case, the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault blocked positioner".
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message "Fault double 1"
(="close").
If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message
"Fault double 0".
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Fault end position
fault".
SIMOCODE pro
4-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Contactor controls
QE1
ON <
OFF
Positioner
Motor protection
QE2
Open
Closed
Inching mode
ON >
Load type
Displays
QLE<
Closed
QLA
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs *
* Abbreviations
F ON
Feedback ON
FC
Feedback CLOSE
FO
Feedback OPEN
TC
Torque CLOSE
TO
Torque OPEN
Stop
Open
Execution time
Interlocking time
FC
F ON*
QLE>
QLS
Status
ON <
FO
TC
OFF
TO
ON >
(Fault)
Closed
Stop
Open
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
Extended controlling
FC
FO
TC
TO
Interlocking time active
Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "positioner" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-49
Motor Control
Variants for slide control
The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:
Variant
Switch off
Close
Open
TC
FC
FO
TO
Torque
End position
End position
Torque
CLOSE
Closed
Open
OPEN
Positioner 1
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE).
—
X
X
—
Positioner 2
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND
response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE)
X
X
X
X
Positioner 3
After reaching the end position FO
(open). After reaching the end
position 'CLOSE', the respective
torque switch TC must respond after
the limit switch FC has responded.
X
X
X
—
Positioner 4
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSE). After reaching the end
position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch TO must also
respond after the limit switch FO
has responded.
—
X
X
X
Positioner 5
After reaching the end position or the
torque. The actuator is either
monitored by the limit switches or by
the torque switches. The switches
are implemented as changeover
contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of nonantivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the
positioner with the fault message
"Fault - antivalence"
Antivalent active
Antivalent active
Table 4-17: Variants for slide control
Attention
The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired
to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas
the position switches must be 1-active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-50
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Positioner
Description
ON <
ON< control command (close)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF
Control command stop
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command (open)
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
FC
Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with the socket of an input which the limit
socket
switch is wired to)
FO
Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with the socket of an input which the limit
socket
switch is wired to)
TC
Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary
socket
, usually with the socket of an input which the torque
switch is wired to)
TO
Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with the socket of an input which the torque
socket
switch is wired to)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
Time until the limit position is reached.
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-18: Control function positioner settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-51
Motor Control
4.2.15
"Soft Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft
starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls.
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal
"Feedback ON" is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated
3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor
2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the
"ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated
3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the
acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
4) Assign the "ON>" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands
5) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output
"fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module
"external fault 1"
6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time"
parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running
down time of the soft starter.
SIMOCODE pro
4-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling
Displays
QE1
Soft starter
OFF
Network contactor
Motor protection
Inching mode
QE3
20 ms.
ON >
QE4
Load type
Displays
QLA
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs
F ON*
ON
QLE>
Execution time
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-23: Schematic of "soft starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Soft starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Feedback ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"
(connection with arbitrary socket
, usually with "Status - current
is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
At least > smooth running down time.
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-19: Soft starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-53
Motor Control
4.2.16
"Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter
including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are
connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control
function, SIMOCODE pro can control the motor direction of rotation
(forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise,
i.e. forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clockwise
i.e. backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the
"Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft
starter.
• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the interlocking time has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
4-54
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Motor Control
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor (right)
2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor (left)
3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the
"ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated
4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the
acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
5) Assign the "ON>", "ON<" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands
6) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output
"fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module
"external fault 1"
7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic
Control commands
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Soft starter with
reversingcontactor
Motorprotection
Inching mode
Save switching
command
Load type
Feedbacks
F ON*
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
Left
QE3
20 ms.
QE4
(ON)
Displays
QLE<
(ON <)
Feedback time
QLA
Execution time
QLE>
Interlocking time
Right
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Interlocking time
Extended controlling
active
Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "soft starter" with reversing contactor control function ("Protecting/
controlling" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4-55
Motor Control
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Soft starter with
reversing
contactor
Description
ON <
ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF
OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON> control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Feedback ON*
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
, usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
socket
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type
You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions")
Feedback time
Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time
At least > smooth running down time.
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-56
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
-
Reversing starter 1),2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Star-delta
starter 2)
-
-
Positioner 2 2)
Positioner 3 2)
Positioner 4 2)
Positioner 5 2)
Soft starter 2)
Soft starter with reversing
contactor 2)
Left
-
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Left
-
-
Left
-
-
ON<
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
-
Positioner 1 2)
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
Valve 2)
Pole-changing switch
with reversing the direction
of rotation 2)
Pole-changing switch 2)
Dahlander
with reversal of the direction
of rotation 2)
Dahlander 2)
-
-
Direct starter 1),2)
Star-delta starter
with reversal of the direction
of rotation 2)
-
ON<<
OFF
OFF
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Closed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
Right
ON
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
-
ON>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON>>
-
Left
-
-
QE2
OFF
impulse
-
-
Active
QE3
-
-
-
-
-
QE4
Reset
-
Reset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Fast
star
contactor
Fast
star
contactor
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
-
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
Left
network- networkcontactor contactor
ON
network
contactor
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON
command
ON
command
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Delta
Right
Left
Star
contactor contactor network network
contactor contactor
Star
Delta Network
contactor contactor contactor
ON
impulse
Right
ON
-
QE1
Contactor control
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
QE5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
-
-
-
-
-
ON<<
QLE<<
(ON<<)
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Left
-
QLA
(OFF)
QLE>
(ON>)
Lamp control
OFF
OFF
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Closed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
Right
ON
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
-
ON>
Status signal
Closed
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Left
-
-
Left
-
ON<
QLE<
(ON<)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON>>
QLE>>
(ON>>)
4.3
Overload 1),2)
Specification/
Control function
Control station
Motor Control
Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls
and Status Signal for the Control Functions
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal
of the control functions
4-57
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-58
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
• Earth fault monitoring
• Current limits monitoring
• Voltage monitoring
• Power factor (cos-phi) monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• Monitoring of 0/4 - 20 mA
• Operation hours monitoring
• Analog temperature monitoring.
Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in
the background". All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained.
They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers
• commissioners
• service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• SIMOCODE pro
• motor protection, motor control
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-1
Monitoring Functions
5.1
Earth fault Monitoring
5.1.1
Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be
monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault.
Internal earth fault monitoring via a current/voltage measuring module is
only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are
either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameterization. It covers 2 operating cases:
• Normal operating case up to 2 x Ie. The effective operating current must be
smaller than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 30 % of the set current
Ie will be detected.
• Start-up or overload operation from 2 x Ie. The effective operating current is
larger than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 15 % of the effective
motor current will be detected.
Note
If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, this can lead
to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
External earth fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and a
earth-fault module is normally used for networks which are grounded with
high impedance.
Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22 summation current transformer. The response delay of the summation current
transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. The response delay can be additionally
increased by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.
A definable and delayable response to a detected earth fault can be parameterized.
A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set additional trippings through parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts either:
• by turning off the contactor controls QE* or
• with a warning
depending on which configuration you set.
SIMOCODE pro
5-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.1.2
Internal Earth Fault Monitoring
Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal earth
fault:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Current from
current or
current/voltage
measuring
module
Earth fault monitoring
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Response/delay
see Table 5-1
Signal "Internal earth fault"
Figure 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" function module
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Internal earth fault
X (d)
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" response
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-3
Monitoring Functions
5.1.3
External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer)
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Earth fault monitoring
Current from
summation current
transformer/
earth-fault module
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Internal earth fault
Signal "External earth fault"
External earth fault
Response/delay
see Table 5-2
Figure 5-2: "Earth fault monitoring" function block
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
External earth fault
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s 1)
Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response
1) Additional delay of the summation current transformer delay
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
5-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.2
Current Limits Monitoring
5.2.1
Description
The current limits monitoring function is used - independently of the overload protection - for process monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely
parameterized and delayed.
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules are used
to measure the motor current.
Current limit values
Switching
off
Trip level: I> 1)
Response when I>
Current I_max from
current measuring
(current or
current/voltage
measuring
module)
See
Table 5-3
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
- Trip level I>
Delay when I>
Warning level: I>
Response when I>
See
Table 5-4
Event
- Warning level I>
Delay when I>
Trip level: I< 2)
Response when I<
See
Table 5-5
Event
- Trip level I<
See
Table 5-6
Event
- Warning level I<
Delay when I<
Warning level: I<
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
Figure 5-3: "Current limits" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-5
Monitoring Functions
5.2.2
I> (Upper Limit)
Trip level, warning level
When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), 2 different response levels,
I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be parameterized and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, the current
limit monitoring is activated.
Trip level:
0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Warning level:
0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Trip level
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-3: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Warning level:
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I>
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (upper limit):
Hysteresis
0 to 15% of the response level value in 1% increments
SIMOCODE pro
5-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.2.3
I< (Lower Limit)
Trip level, warning level
When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), 2 different response levels
(trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current
of the phases (Imax)falls below the response level, the current limit monitoring is activated.
Trip level:
0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Warning level:
0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Trip level
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-5: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Warning level:
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):
Hysteresis
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
0 to 15% of response level value in 1% increments
5-7
Monitoring Functions
5.3
Voltage Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a
three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits.
The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the voltage. This
is based on the minimal voltage of all voltages Umin.
Voltage monitoring
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Trip level: U<
Trip level activity
Response at trip level
Voltage Umin
via
current/voltage
measuring module
See
Table 5-7
Event
- Trip level I<
Trip delay
Warning level: U<
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
See
Table 5-8
Event
- Warning level I<
Warning delay
Hysteresis 1)
1)Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
Figure 5-4: "Voltage monitoring" function block
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/ warning level).
If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or
warning level, the voltage monitoring is activated.
Trip level:
0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments
Warning level:
0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments
SIMOCODE pro
5-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
Activity of the trip level and warning level
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
• Always, except in the case of TPF
(on+) (d)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary;
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test
position.
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is on and not in the test position
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Trip level
Deactivated
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
-
Switch off
X
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Warning level
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
X
Switch off
-
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring
Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi) and
power:
Hysteresis for voltage, power factor
(cos phi), power
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
0 to 15% of the response level value
in 1% increments
5-9
Monitoring Functions
5.4
Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring
Description
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or
3-phase networks, whose loads vary greatly. The measuring principle for the
power factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement
between voltage and current in one phase. If the set trip or warning level is
undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off depending on
the setting.
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Trip level
Power factor (cos phi)
from current/voltage
measuring
module
Response
See
Table 5-9
Event
- Trip level power factor
(cos phi) <
See
Table 5-10
Event
- Warning level power factor
(cos phi) <
Delay
Warning level
Response
Delay
Hysteresis 1)
1) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
(see "Voltage monitoring" function block)
Figure 5-5: "Power factor (cos phi) monitoring" function block
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
power factor (cos phi) monitoring.
Trip level:
0 to 100%
Warning level:
0 to 100%
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
SIMOCODE pro
5-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Trip level
Deactivated
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
-
Switch off
X
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Warning level
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
X
Switch off
-
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-11
Monitoring Functions
5.5
Active Power Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via
the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow
rate or fluid fill levels.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely
parameterized and delayed.
Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the active power.
Power monitoring
Switching
off
Trip level: P> 1)
Response when P>
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
See
Table 5-11
Event
- Trip level P>
See
Table 5-12
Event
- Warning level P>
Delay when P>
Active power from
current/voltage
measuring module
Warning level: P>
Response when P>
Delay when P>
Trip level: P< 2)
Response when P<
See
Table 5-11
Event
- Trip level P<
Delay when P<
Warning level: P<
Response when P<
See
Table 5-12
Event
- Warning level P<
Delay when P<
Hysteresis 3)
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
3) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
(see "Voltage monitoring" function block)
Figure 5-6: "Power monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
5-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
upper and lower limits for active power monitoring.
Trip level
• P> (upper limit)
• P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Warning level:
• P> (upper limit)
• P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is overshot or undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Trip level
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring
Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Signal
Warn
Switch off
Delay
Warning level
X (d)
X
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-13
Monitoring Functions
5.6
0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a
measuring transducer (normalized output signal 0/4-20 mA). The analog
signals are fed to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
Switching
off
Trip level 0/4-20 mA >
Trip level activity
Response at trip level
See
Table 5-13
Event
Trip level
0/4 A -20 mA >
Trip delay
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA >
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
See
Table 5-14
Warning delay
Analog input 1 of the
analog module
(AM input 1)
Event
Warning level
0/4 A -20 mA >
Marking Warning Level
Trip level 0/4-20 mA <
Trip Level activity
Response at trip level
See
Table 5-13
Event
Trip level
0/4 A -20 mA <
Trip delay
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA <
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
Warning delay
See
Table 5-14
Event
Warning level
0/4 A -20 mA <
Marking warning level
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA
Figure 5-7: "0/4-20 mA signal monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
5-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
upper and lower limits for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring.
Trip level
• 0/4-20>(upper limit)
• 0/4-20<(lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA
Warning level:
• 0/4-20>(upper limit)
• 0/4-20<(lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA
Activity of the trip level and warning level
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
• Always (on) (d)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary
• Always, except in the case of TPF
(on+) (d)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary with the exception of "TPF", i.e.
motor feeder is in test position
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is on and not in the test position
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF, with start hiding (run+)
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if
the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position
feedback (TPF)
Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Trip level
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
-
Switch off
Delay
X
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-15
Monitoring Functions
Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set
warning level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
Response
Deactivated
Warning level
X (d)
Signal
X
Warn
X
Switch off
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
Marking
Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: up to
10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA signal
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Hysteresis for the analog signal
0 to 15% in 1% increments
Note
Free limit monitors can, for example, be used to monitor a second process
variable via input 2 of the analog module.
SIMOCODE pro
5-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.7
Operation Monitoring
5.7.1
Description
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor
and limit the number of motor start-ups in a defined time frame. This avoids
plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too
long (wear-out) or they were stopped for too long a period of time.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued
which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or
even that the motor should be replaced.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature
aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be
limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing
in SIMOCODE pro.
The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Note
All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the bus..
Switching
off
Operation monitoring
Operating hours
Level
See
Table 5-15
Response
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
Operating hours >
Stop time
Level
Control
function
Response
See
Table 5-15
Number of starts
Event - Stop time >
Permissible starts
Permissible starts
Time range for starts
Response at overshoot
See
Table 5-15
Event
- Number of motor starts >
Response at pre-warning
See
Table 5-15
- Just one start possible
Interlocking time
- No start permitted
Figure 5-8: "Operation monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-17
Monitoring Functions
Response
Response
Deactivated
Operating
hours monitoring - level
Stop time
monitoring level
Number of
starts
response at
overshoot
level
Number of
start
pre-warnings
X (d)
X (d)
X (d)
X (d)
Signal
X
X
X
X
Warn
X
X
X
X
Switch off
-
-
X
-
Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response
5.7.2
Operating Hours Monitoring
The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of measuring the
operating hours (service life) of a motor and if necessary, generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time.
Response level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring
function is activated.
Response level:
0 to 1,193,046 hours
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
You can set the response at overshoot here.
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
5.7.3
Stop Time Monitoring
In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation
(A and B drives). It must be assured here that these drives are always alternately run to avoid long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability.
The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a
warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be connected.
Response level
The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated
when this stop time interval is exceeded.
Response level:
0 to 65,535 hours
SIMOCODE pro
5-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is
exceeded:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
5.7.4
Monitoring the Number of Starts
The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system
parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters, and converters)
against too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable
time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially
useful for start-up or manual control.
The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring
the number of starts.
1. Start within the time frame
Example:
3 starts allowed
Time frame
t
Pre-warning
Overshooting
Figure 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts
Permissible starts
The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time
interval "Time range for starts" starts to run. After the second to the last permissible start has been executed, a pre-warning "Another start permitted" is
issued.
Permissible starts
1 to 255
Time range for starts
The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of
starts is only available again after the parameterizable time range for starts
has ended. The available starts are shown by the analog value "Permissible
starts - actual value".
Time range for starts
0 to 65,535 seconds
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-19
Monitoring Functions
Response at Overshoot
Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible number of starts within the time range for starts have been overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
Response at Pre-Warning
Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last
start:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last permissible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer
be executed by the setting "Response at Overshoot- switching off". The
"Fault - number of starts >" and the set interlocking time is activated.
Interlocking time
0 to 65,535 seconds
SIMOCODE pro
5-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.8
Analog Temperature Monitoring
Schematic and characteristic curve
Up to three analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100,
PT1000, can be used for temperature monitoring of, for example, the motor
windings, the motor bearings, the coolant and the gearbox temperature.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: separate response levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch
off temperature.
Temperature monitoring is based on the highest temperature present in all
the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.
Temperature monitoring
Switching
off
Trip level (2)
Response at trip level
QE2
QE3
QE4
See
Tables
"Response"
(Marking)
Max. temperature of all
the sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature
module
QE1
QE5
Event
- Temperature module
Trip level T>
Warning level (1)
Response at warning level
(Marking)
See
Tables
"Response"
- Temperature module
Warning level T>
Hysteresis
Figure 5-10: "Temperature monitoring" function block
Settings
Temperature
Description
Trip level T>
-273 °C - 65,262 °C
Response at trip level
T>
Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and chapter "Important Notes")
Marking: Trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters
Warning level T >
-273 °C -65,262 °C
Response warninglevel T >
Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and chapter "Important Notes")
Marking: Warning
level T >
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters
Hysteresis
0 - 255 °C in 1 °C increments
Table 5-16: Temperature monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-21
Monitoring Functions
Trip level activity and warning level activity
The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the
motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
• Overtemperature: Here you can choose how SIMOCODE pro should respond
if the temperature overshoots the warning level/trip level.
Response
Warning limit T>
Trip level T>
Deactivated
X
-
Signal
X
X
Warn
X (d)
-
-
X (d)
Switch off
Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "switch
off"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response
to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature module inputs
(TM inputs)" function block when temperature monitoring is used.
SIMOCODE pro
5-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring Functions
5.9
Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions
The following diagram shows the function of the hysteresis with the monitoring functions:
0HDVXUHG
YDOXH
+\VWHUHVLV
7ULSOHYHO!
:DUQLQJOHYHO!
+\VWHUHVLV
+\VWHUHVLV
:DUQLQJOHYHO
7ULSOHYHO
+\VWHUHVLV
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ 7ULSOHYHO!
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ :DUQLQJOHYHO!
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ :DUQLQJOHYHO
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ 7ULSOHYHO
7LPH
7KHK\VWHUHVHVDUHDOZD\VEDVHGRQWKHUHVSHFWLYHO\VHWUHVSRQVHOHYHO
H[FHSWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
7KHWULSDQGZDUQLQJOHYHOHYHQWVFDQDOVREHGHOD\HGLQGLYLGXDOO\
Figure 5-11: The operating principle of hysteresis for the monitoring function
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5-23
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
6
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the outputs of
SIMOCODE pro:
• Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
• Analog module output
• Light-emitting diodes of the operator panel
• Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-1
Outputs
6.1
Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different types of outputs. These are represented by
the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external interfaces of SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represented as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via
connections to arbitrary functions or signals.
The outputs include, for example:
• Output terminals
located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different stati
• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the different
types of outputs:
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
LED operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
DP
PROFIBUS DP
Figure 6-1: General display of the different types of outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
Extent and application
Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the status or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of
outputs depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:
SIMOCODE
Outputs
pro C (BU1)
pro V(GG2)
Basic unit BU (BU outputs)
✓
✓
Operator panel LED (BU LED)
✓
✓
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 outputs)
—
✓
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 outputs)
—
✓
Analog module output (AM output)
—
✓
Acyclic signaling data (Acyclic Send)
✓
✓
Cyclic signaling data (Cyclic Send)
✓
✓
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-3
Outputs
6.2
Basic Unit Outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU - outputs" function block with 3 relay outputs. You
can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs
(plugs) of the function block must be connected to the corresponding sokkets (typically the contactor controls QE. of the control function). The "BU outputs" function block consists of
• 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
• 3 relays
• Output terminals.
In total there is:
– 1 "BU - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU - outputs" function block:
SIMOCODE pro
BU - output
1
2
1
Terminal numbers
Out1
2
Out2
3
3
6
Out3
7
Output terminals
Figure 6-2: "BU - outputs" function block
Application examples
• Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the
corresponding "QE." contactor control.
• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/
LEDs displaying the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast,
slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding "QE." contactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and
LEDs:
The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays
via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the
SIMOCODE pro
6-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
relay outputs
– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s.
Settings
BU outputs
Outputs 1 to 3
Description
Controls the "BU- outputs" function block from an arbitrary signal
(optional sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: BU output settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-5
Outputs
6.3
Operator Panel LEDs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP - LED" function block to control the 7 freely
usable 7 LEDs. The LEDs are on the operator panel and can be used for arbitrary status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP - LED" function
block must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. with the sokkets for the status signals of the control function).
Note
The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
The "OP - LED" function block contains
• 4 plugs, "OP - LED green 1" to "OP - LED green 4", corresponding to the green
LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the
operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state
• 3 plugs, "OP - LED yellow 1" to "OP - LED yellow 3", corresponding to the yellow LEDs
• 4 green LEDs
• 3 yellow LEDs
In total there is:
– 1 "OP - LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Operator panel LEDs
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with the
LEDs:
Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3
Figure 6-3: LEDs of the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
6-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP - LED" function block:
OP - LED
LED
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Figure 6-4: Schematic of the "OP - LED" function block
Application examples
• Displaying operating states:
You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor
operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding "QL." lamp control of
the control function.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.
Settings
OP LED
Green 1 - Green 4
Description
Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. feedback operating state "motor")
Yellow 1 - Yellow 3 Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. displays for status, events, faults)
Table 6-3: OP LED settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-7
Outputs
6.4
Digital Module Outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has 2 function blocks: "DM1 - outputs" and "DM2 - outputs",
with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM - outputs" function
blocks) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. of the control
function).
Note
Function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM)
are connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Each function block contains
• 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2
• 2 relays
• Output terminals.
In total there is
– 1 "DM1 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
– 1 "DM2 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM - outputs" function blocks:
DM1 - outputs
1
2
DM2 - outputs
Out1
Out2
Output terminals
1
2
Out1
Out2
Output terminals
Figure 6-5: Schematic of the "DM1 - outputs"/"DM2 - outputs" function block
Application examples
• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QE." contactor control of the control function.
• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast,
slow ...).
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QL..." lamp
control of the control function.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
6-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
Settings
DM1 / DM2 output
settings
Outputs 1 to 2
Description
Controls the "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
from an arbitrary signal
PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 - outputs" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-9
Outputs
6.5
Analog Module Output
Description
You can expand the basic unit 2 by an analog output using the analog
module. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/
1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for
example, on a pointer instrument which is connected. By activating the
function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with an arbitrary
integer value between 0 and 27,648, an equivalent analog signal of
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA is outputted to the output terminals of the analog
module..
Note
The "AM - output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM)
is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM - output" function block:
AM - output
Assigned
analog output value
Start value range
End value range
Out+
Out+
Output signal
Figure 6-6: Schematic of the "AM - output" function block
Settings
Signal/value
Range
Assigned analog output value
Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Output signal
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Start value range
0 - 65,535
End value range
0 - 65,535
Table 6-5: "AM - output" settings
SIMOCODE pro
6-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
Application examples
1) Output of the effective motor current - over the entire motor current
range
The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.
The nominal current IN of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.
The set current Ie parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nominal current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective
phase currents or of the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3,
max. current I_max) is according to the range chosen proportional to the
parameterized set current Ie:
– 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Ie
– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Ie
– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1 % (see measured values data record 94 ).
PRWRUFXUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
HQWLUHUDQJH
PRWRUFXUUHQWRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1
W>V@
Figure 6-7: Application example (output of the motor current - entire range)
As a result,
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is:
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is:
0
400.
AM - output
Assigned
analog output value
Max. current I_max
0
Start value range
400
End value range
0-20 mA
Out+
Out+
Output signal
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-11
Outputs
2) Output of the effective motor current - partial range (overload range)
of the motor current only
The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.
The nominal current IN of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.
The set current Ie parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nominal current IN (2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be displayed on a pointer instrument via the analog module output.
In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective phase currents or of
the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) is according to the range chosen proportional to the parameterized set current Ie:
– 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Ie
– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Ie
– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1 % (see measured values data record 94).
PRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
3DUWLDOUDQJHRIWKHPRWRUFXUUHQW
2YHUORDGUDQJHRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1
W>V@
Figure 6-8: Application example: output of the motor current - overload range
As a result
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is:
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is:
100
400.
AM - output
Assigned
analog output value
Max. current I_max
100
Start value range
400
End value range
0-20 mA
Out+
Out+
Output signal
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 100 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 100 % motor current corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output
SIMOCODE pro
6-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
3) Cyclic output of an analog value from the automation system via the
PROFIBUS
It is possible to cyclically transmit a word (2 bytes) from the automation
system to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS. An arbitrary value can be outputted as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control
word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value
is in S7 Format (0 to 27648), this should be taken into consideration for the
parameterization:
AM - output
Assigned
analog output value
0
Zyklisch Steuern 2/3
(1 cycl. word from the PLC)
27648
Start value range
End value range
0-20 mA
As a result,
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is:
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is:
Out+
Out+
Output signal
0
27648.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 0 corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 0 corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-13
Outputs
6.6
Cyclic Send
Description
The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks are used to determine which information is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks consists of
• 8 bits each (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 4 words (= 8 bytes, byte 2 to byte 9 for four analog values, freely parameterizable)
• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are
– 3 "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:
Cyclic Send 0 with 8 Bits
for binary information
Cyclic Send 1 with 8 Bits
for binary Information
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Byte 0
Bit 0
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Cyclic Send
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 2
Bit 3
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Cyclic Send 2/9 with 4 word (8 bytes)
for up to four analog values
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Cyclic Send 2/9
Byte 2/3
Byte 4/5 To the
DP
Byte 6/7 PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Send
DP
to PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Send 2/3 with 1 word (2 bytes)
for one analog value
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Cyclic Send 2/9
Byte 2/3
To the
PROFIBUS DP
DP
Byte 8/9
Figure 6-9: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function block
SIMOCODE pro
6-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Outputs
Cyclic services
Cyclic send data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic control data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic
send data to the DP master.
Settings
Cyclic signaling
data
Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Basic types 1, 2
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.)
Byte 2/3
Basic types 1, 2
Controls 1 word (2 bytes) with arbitrary analog values
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9
Basic type 1
Controls 4 words (8 bytes) with arbitrary analog values
(arbitrary sockets
Table 6-6: Cyclic Send data settings
Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the
max. current!
For this, see also chapter 12.2 "Transmitting Data".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6-15
Outputs
6.7
Acyclic Send
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send", it is also possible to transmit an additional 16
bits of information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The "Cyclic Send" function block is used to determine which information is
issued cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the
inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the corresponding sockets.
The "Cyclic Send" function block consists of
• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are
• 2 "Acyclic Send" function blocks for the BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic signaling" function blocks:
Byte 0
Bit 0
Acyclic Send
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 2
Bit 3
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Acyclic Send
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Figure 6-10: Schematic of the "Acyclic signaling" function block
Acyclic services
Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request.
The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic Send data
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Description
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state information, fault signals, etc.)
Table 6-7: Acyclic Send data settings
SIMOCODE pro
6-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The inputs include:
• Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules
• Operator panel buttons
• Temperature module inputs
• Analog module inputs
• Control data from PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Inputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-1
Inputs
7.1
Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different inputs. These are represented by the different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external interfaces of
SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as
sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via connections to arbitrary functions. The inputs can be:
• Input terminals
, located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• Buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable
buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset)
• Temperature module inputs
• Analog module inputs
• Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the different
types of inputs:
SIMOCODE pro
Input
Input terminals
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands
- Test/reset
Input
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS DP
DP
Input
Sockets
Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
7-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Extent and application
Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via corresponding connections. The system provides different
inputs, depending on the device series:
SIMOCODE
Inputs
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Basic unit inputs (BU inputs)
✓
✓
Operator panel buttons (OP buttons)
✓
✓
Digital module 1 - inputs (DM1 inputs)
—
✓
Digital module 2 - inputs (DM2 inputs)
—
✓
Temperature module inputs (TM inputs)
—
✓
Analog module inputs (AM inputs)
—
✓
Acyclic Receive
✓
✓
Cyclic Receive
✓
✓
Table 7-1: Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-3
Inputs
7.2
Basic Unit Inputs
Description
The basic unit has a function block "BU - inputs" function block with 4 grouped binary inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU - inputs"
function block.
The "BU - inputs" function block consists of
• Input terminals
, located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding
to the sockets "BU - input 1" to "BU - input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"control stations" function block
• A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button:
The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the operating status of the device:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button
(e.g. operation of the memory module, addressing plug).
For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
In total there is:
– 1 "BU - inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU - inputs" function block:
Basic unit (BU)
Terminal
numbers
BU - inputs
8
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
3
IN4
4
9
10
4
5
Taste
Test/reset
BU - test/reset button
Figure 7-2: Schematic of the "BU - inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Application examples
The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons
of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "local control"
internal control station.
Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault".
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 1.7.1 "Basic Units (BU)".
Settings
Basic unit
Description
Delay Inputs
If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).
Table 7-2: "BU - inputs" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-5
Inputs
7.3
Operator Panel Buttons
Description
The operator panel contains the buttons 1 to 4 and the "TEST/RESET"
button. Correspondingly, the "OP - buttons" function block has 5 available
sockets in SIMOCODE pro.
Note
The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:
The buttons 1 to 4 are usually intended for inputting control commands for
the motor feeder. Control commands can be:
– motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter
– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing
starter
– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands and can also be assigned to other functions by
internally connecting the corresponding sockets of the function block in
SIMOCODE pro.
• Operator panel, "TEST/RESET" button
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed
functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests.
– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Despite this, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be read from the
corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further
functions in SIMOCODE pro.
For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
SIMOCODE pro
7-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Operating panel buttons
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with buttons:
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 "TEST/RESET" button
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
Figure 7-3: Operator panel buttons
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP - buttons" function block:
Button 1
OP - buttons
OP - button 1
Button 2
OP - button 2
Button 3
OP - button 3
Button 4
OP - button 4
Button
TEST/RESET
OP - Test/Reset button
Figure 7-4: Schematic of the "OP - buttons" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-7
Inputs
7.4
Digital Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM - inputs" function blocks with 4 grouped binary
inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in SIMOCODE pro
by internally wiring the of the sockets of the "DM - inputs" function blocks.
Note
The "DM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding digital module (DM) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Every "DM - inputs" function block consists of
• Input terminals
, located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the sockets "DM - input 1" to "DM - input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"control stations" function block.
In total there is:
– 1 function block "DM1 - input" and "DM2 - input" for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM - inputs" function blocks:
Digital module (DM)
Terminal
numbers
Digital module (DM)
DM1 - inputs
DM2 - inputs
25
25
IN1
1
23
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
3
IN4
4
23
IN2
2
24
24
IN3
3
26
26
IN4
4
27
27
Figure 7-5: Schematic of the "DM - inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Application examples
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary
inputs and outputs on basic device 2.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 binary outputs. Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals
can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External fault". An external fault can be the binary signal of an external rotational-speed monitor which signals that the setpoint speed of a motor has
been undershot.
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 1.7.5 "Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device
Series".
Settings
Basic unit
Delays Inputs
Description
If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms.
These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input
supply.
For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the
values are about 40 ms higher.
Table 7-3: "DM - inputs" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-9
Inputs
7.5
Temperature Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM - inputs" function block with three analog sockets
corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module. The temperature (°C) of the three measuring circuits can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket
supplies the maximum temperature of the three measured temperatures.
The two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the
sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally
and/or transmitted to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function
block.
Note
The "TM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding temperature module (TM) was connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM - inputs" function block:
TM - inputs
Inputs
R
PT / KTY
50
1T3
51
2T3
52
3T3
Max. temperature
1
2
u
NTC
R
1
2
u
Terminal
numbers
53
1T2
54
2T2
55
3T2
56
T1
57
T1
Sensor type
Temperature 1
Temperature 2
Response to sensor
fault /Out of range
Number of act. sensors
Temperature 3
Signal
Sensor fault
Out of range
Figure 7-6: Schematic of the "TM - inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. Further
information can be found in chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
SIMOCODE pro
7-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Application examples
You can monitor, amongst others, the following motor components:
• Motor windings
• Motor bearings
• Motor coolant temperature
• Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be monitored independently of each other by means of a connection to free limit
monitors.
Settings
Temperature module
Description
Sensor Type:
PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) to sensor fault/
Out of range
Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off
Number of active sensors
1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors
Table 7-4: Temperature module input settings
1)
Response
Deactivated
Sensor fault/Out of range
X
Signal
X
Warn
X (d)
Switch off
X
Delay
-
Table 7-5: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-11
Inputs
7.6
Analog Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "AM - inputs" function block with two analog sockets
corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The current
analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed
internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the
status of the sensor measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed
internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the
"Cyclic Send" function block.
Note
The "AM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding analog module (AM) was connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM - inputs" function block:
AM - inputs
Inputs
Terminal
numbers
30
IN1
Input signal
31
IN2
Response to
wire break
Input 1
33
IN1
Active inputs
34
IN2
Wire break
signal
Input 2
Figure 7-7: Schematic of the "AM - inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
Application examples
Typical applications are, for example:
• Fill level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
Settings
Analog module
Description
Input signal
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Response to wire break
Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off
Active inputs
1 input, 2 inputs
Table 7-6: Analog module inputs settings
Safety instructions
Attention
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs. This means that in order
to configure an analog input circuit, every input requires an additional external current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is
not being used by another application, it can be used as a current source for
an input circuit of the analog module. To make use of this option, the "Start
value range" and the "End value range" must be set to 65535. In this way,
the max. possible current is made available via the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-13
Inputs
7.7
Cyclic Receive
Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic information from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro.
This is normally in the form of binary control commands from the PLC/DCS.
The motor can be made controllable via the PROFIBUS DP, by means of a
connection with the "control stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro. The
"Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely programmable)
for basic type 1
• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are:
– 3 "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:
Cyclic Receive 0
Cyclic Receive 1
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
DP
DP
From the PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Receive 2/3 1)
Bit 3
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 2
DP
From the PROFIBUS DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Analog value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only
Figure 7-8: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function block
Cyclic services
The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master
and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic receive) to
SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signal
data (cyclic send) to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
7-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Inputs
7.8
Acyclic Receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", there is also the option of transferring further
information acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS DP. With the
"Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information
from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro.
For this, you must connect the sockets of the "Acyclic Receive" function
block to arbitrary function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consists of:
• 8 bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary Information)
• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)
• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DP
In total there are:
• 3 "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:
Acyclic Receive 0
Acyclic Receive 1
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
DP
DP
From the PROFIBUS DP
Acyclic Receive 2/3 1)
Bit 3
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 2
DP
From the PROFIBUS DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Analog value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only
Figure 7-9: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function block
Acyclic services
Acyclic data is only transferred on request.
The information (4 bytes) is in data record 202.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated
after the receipt of each data set. The content of the data sets is deleted
after the time-out has elapsed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7-15
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Analog Value Recording
8
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the
measuring curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current
when the motor is running, using SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all
cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the characteristic
curve of the motor current at different points in time and making direct comparisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor
and the equipment.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers
• commissioners
• service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• SIMOCODE pro
• motor protection, motor control
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Motor control.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
8-1
Analog Value Recording
Description
The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record various
analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic
curve of the motor current when the motor is started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor
feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every
analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is recorded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60
values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording
is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values.
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording
should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, you can also export
the measuring curve into a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in
MS Excel.
Functional principle
$OORFDWHGDQDORJYDOXH
HJPRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[>@
WLPH
3UHWULJJHU>@
6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@
6DPSOLQJWLPH 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@
7ULJJHULQSXW
7ULJJHUHGJH SRVLWLYH
WLPH
Figure 8-1: Functional principle of the analog value recording
The old measuring curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a
new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.
SIMOCODE pro
8-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Analog Value Recording
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog value recording" function block:
Record
Trigger input
Allocated
analog value
Trigger edge
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
Figure 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog value record" function block
Settings
Signal/value
Range
Trigger input
The analog value recording starts when
,
any signal is issued (arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, motor current flowing)
Allocated analog value
Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge
Positive/negative
Sampling rate
0.1 to 50 s in 0.1s increments
Pre-trigger
0 to 100% in 5% increments
Table 8-1: "Analog value record" settings
Application example
Record of the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/
pre-trigger = 25% (3 s):
Record
Motor current flowing
Max. current I_max
positive
Trigger edge
0.2 s
Sampling rate
25%
Pre-trigger
Figure 8-3: Application example of the analog value record
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
8-3
Analog Value Recording
SIMOCODE pro
8-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
9
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Description
The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is
to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro-V basic
unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.
In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as
communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC
(Master class 1).
SIMOCODE-DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis
as well as DPV1 date records (DR 130, DS 131, DS 133).
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE-DP to
be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device
parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win-SIMOCODE-DP Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP into
SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
9-1
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Safety instructions
Attention
Communication with a DP-Master (Master class 2), e.g. with the Win-SIMOCODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the
3UF50 compatibility mode.
Attention
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set,
i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using SIMOCODEDP-GSD or the object manager SIMOCODE-DP cannot be integrated into
SIMOCODE pro V.
Attention
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which
SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the
object manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP.
SIMOCODE pro
9-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Diagram of the control and signaling data
The following table shows the control and signaling data in the compatibility
mode:
Controlling
Basic type 1
SIMOCODEDP
0
1
2
Control data
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODEDP.
Cyclic receive - bit 0
0 1.7
1
Not supported
3
2
Control data
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODEDP
Cyclic receive - bit 0
0 1.7
1
Not supported
3
2
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
Cyclic receive - bit
0 1.7
Control data
Not supported
3
Table 9-1: "Controlling" configuration
Signalling
Basic type 1
SIMOCODEDP
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
0
Signaling data
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2
Number of
starts
Number of starts
(Bytes 0 - 3)
Value
counter 1
Counter 1
Actual value
9
Value
10 counter 2
Counter 2
Actual value
11 Value sensor
TM - Max.temperature
0
1
Basic type 2
SIMOCODEDP
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODEDP
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
0
1 Signaling data
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
1
Signaling data
2
3
4
5
3
Motor current
3
Acycl. signalling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
6
7
8
Table 9-2: "Signalling" configuration
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
9-3
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Diagram of the diagnosis data
The following table shows the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility
mode:
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
6
0x0B
7
0x81
8
0x04
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
Same as 3UF50 diagnosis
6
0x0E
9
0x00
7.0
Free
10.0
Free
7.1
Event: DP block
10.1
Event: DP block
Event - Start-up parameter
block active
7.2
Event: Emergency start
10.2
Event: Emergency start
Status - Emergency start performed
7.3
Event: HW test ok
10.3
Event: HW test ok
• No fault - HW fault basic unit
• No fault - module fault
• No fault - Temporary components
7.4
Free
10.4
Free
-
7.5
Event: Ext. event 1
10.5
Event: Ext. event 1
Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6
Event: Ext. event 2
10.6
Event: Ext. event 2
Event - Ext. fault 6
7.7
Event: Ext. event 3
10.7
Event: Ext. event 3
-
8.0
Warning: Ext. warning
11.0
Warning: Ext. warning
Warning - Ext. fault 3
8.1
Warning: Unbalance > 40%
11.1
Warning: Unbalance > 40%
Warning - Unbalance
8.2
Event: Failure PLC-CPU
11.2
Event: Failure PLC-CPU
Status - PLC/DCS
8.3
Warning: Sensor short circuit
11.3
Warning: Sensor short circuit
Warning - Thermistor short circuit
8.4
Event: Cooling down time active 11.4
Event: Cooling down time active Status - Cooling down time active
8.5
Status: TPF
11.5
Status: TPF
Status - test position (TPF)
8.6
Free
11.6
Free
-
8.7
Free
11.7
Free
-
9.0
Warning: Earth fault
12.0
Warning: Earth fault
• Warning - Int. earth fault
or
• Warning - Ext. earth fault
9.1
Warning: Overload
12.1
Warning Overload
Warning - Overload
9.2
Warning: Overload + Unbalance
12.2
Warning: Overload + Unbalance
Warning - Overload + phase failure
9.3
Warning: I1 response level
overshot
12.3
Warning: I1 response level
overshot
Warning - Warning level I>
9.4
Warning: I1 response level
undershot
12.4
Warning: I1 response level
undershot
Warning - Warning level I<
9.5
Warning: I2 response level
overshot
12.5
Warning: I2 response level
overshot
-
9.6
Warning: I2 response level
undershot
12.6
Warning: I2 response level
undershot
-
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
9.7
Warning: Thermistor
12.7
Warning: Thermistor
• Warning - Thermistor overload
• Warning - Thermistor wire break
• Warning - TM warning T>
• Signal - TM sensor error
• Warning - TM out of range
10.0
Trip: Earth fault
13.0
Trip: Earth fault
• Fault - Int. earth fault
or
• Fault - Int. earth fault
10.1
Trip: Overload
13.1
Trip: Overload
Fault - Overload
10.2
Trip: Overload + Unbalance
13.2
Trip: Overload + Unbalance
Fault - Overload + phase failure
10.3
Trip: I1 response level overshot
13.3
Trip: I1 response level overshot
Fault - trip level I>
10.4
Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4
Trip: I1 response level undershot Fault - trip level I<
10.5
Trip: I2 response level overshot
Trip: I2 response level overshot
10.6
Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6
Trip: I2 response level undershot -
10.7
Trip: Thermistor
13.7
Trip: Thermistor
• Fault - Thermistor overload
• Fault - Thermistor short circuit
• Fault - Thermistor wire break
• Fault - TM tripping T>
• Fault - TM sensor error
• Fault - TM out of range
11.0
Trip: F ON*
14.0
Trip: F ON*
Fault - Feedback ON
11.1
Trip: F OFF
14.1
Trip: F OFF
Fault - Feedback ON
11.2
Trip: Motor blocked
14.2
Trip: Motor blocked
Fault - Blocking
11.3
Trip: Positioner blocked
14.3
Trip: Positioner blocked
Fault - Blocking positioner
11.4
Trip: Double 0
14.4
Trip: Double 0
Fault - Double 0
11.5
Trip: Double 1
14.5
Trip: Double 1
Fault - Double 1
11.6
Trip: End position
14.6
Trip: End position
Fault - End position
11.7
Trip: Antivalence
14.7
Trip: Antivalence
Fault - Antivalence
12.0
Trip: Ready for Switch-on
15.0
Trip: Ready for Switch-on
Fault - Ext. fault 4
12.1
Trip: OPO
15.1
Trip: OPO
Fault: Operational protection off (OPO)
12.2
Trip: UVO
15.2
Trip: UVO
Fault - Undervoltage (UVO)
12.3
Trip: Ext. fault 1
15.3
Trip: Ext. fault 1
Fault - Ext. fault 1
12.4
Trip: Ext. fault 2
15.4
Trip: Ext. fault 2
Fault - Ext. fault 2
12.5
Trip: TPF fault
15.5
Trip: TPF fault
Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error
12.6
Trip: Runtime ON
15.6
Trip: Runtime ON
Fault - Execution ON command
12.7
Trip: Runtime OFF
15.7
Trip: Runtime OFF
Fault - Execution OFF command
13.0
Trip: Parameter fault 0
16.0
Trip: Parameter fault 0
Fault - Parameterization
13.1
Trip: Parameter fault 1
16.1
Trip: Parameter fault 1
-
13.2
Trip: Parameter fault 2
16.2
Trip: Parameter fault 2
-
13.3
Trip: Parameter fault 3
16.3
Trip: Parameter fault 3
-
13.4
Trip: Parameter fault 4
16.4
Trip: Parameter fault 4
Fault - Configuration fault
13.5
Trip: Parameter fault 5
16.5
Trip: Parameter fault 5
-
13.6
Trip: Parameter fault 6
16.6
Trip: Parameter fault 6
-
13.7
Trip: Parameter fault 7
16.7
Trip: Parameter fault 7
Fault - Configuration fault
13.5
-
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
9-5
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
14 15
Number of overload trips
Number of overload trips
16 17
I of the overload trip [%/IE)]
Last tripping current
18 19
Operating hours [10h]
Motor operating hours
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
9-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored
as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor
functions which can be activated according to need and can be set individually for each motor feeder.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• Motor protection
• control functions, control stations.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Standard functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-1
Standard Functions
10.1
Introduction
Description
In SIMOCODE pro there are also so-called "standard functions" in
the form of function blocks for use according to need. These function blocks
can contain:
• Plugs
)
• Sockets
) in the form of a signal
• Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signal", "Warn"
or "Switch off").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function
block of a standard function:
Plug 1 - n
Standard function
Plug 1 - n
Plug 1 - n
Setting value
Figure 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function
Extent and application
These function blocks work independently of the selected control function
and can be used as optional supplements. They are already available and
only have to be activated by connecting the plug(s) of the respective
function block.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function
blocks for such standard functions:
SIMOCODE pro
Function block
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Test
2
2
Reset
3
3
Test position feedback (TPF)
1
1
External fault
4
6
Operational protection off (OPO)
—
1
Power failure monitoring (UVO)
—
1
Emergency start
1
1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS)
1
1
Timestamping
—
1
Table 10-1: Function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
10-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.2
Test/Reset
Test/reset description
The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the operating status of the device:
• Reset function: When a fault occurs
• Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro offers a further
option to trip an internal Test/Reset via the "Test" function block. The "Test"
function block consists of:
• 1 plug.
In total there are:
• 2 "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks for BU1 and BU2, whereby the function
blocks differ from each other functionally:
– Test 1: when testing/switching off the output relays
– Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the
bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the "Test/
Reset" function block:
"Test/reset" function block
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
Reset 3
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Control functions
Reset 2
Reset 3
"TEST/RESET" BU button
Test/reset buttons locked
"TEST/RESET" OP button
Figure 10-2: "Test/reset" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-3
Standard Functions
Carrying out the test
The test can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel
(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks
The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the
thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it
can immediately be switched back again.
Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operating mode is set to "Remote".
Reset function:
The reset function can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel
(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the
internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
The "Reset" function block consists of:
• 1 plug.
In total there are:
– 3 function blocks, "Reset 1 to 3" for BU1 and BU2.
All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).
Test function:
A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be initialized using the test
function.
The test function includes the following steps:
• Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s)
• Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to -5 s)
• Only for the "Test 1" function block: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
10-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test
phase
Status
Without main current
With main current
O.K.
O.K.
Fault *)
Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
< 2s
Orange
Green
Orange
Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
2s - 5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Deactivated
Unchanged
Deactivated
Relay test
"DEVICE" LED
> 5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
LED lit/activated
Deactivated
LED flashing
Deactivated
Deactivated
LED flickering
Deactivated
LED off
*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s
Table 10-2: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
Test settings
Test 1 to 2 -
Description
Input
Activates the "Test" function block using any signal (arbitrary sokkets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button
locked
The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out
device tests.
The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They
can then be used for other purposes.
Table 10-3: Test settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-5
Standard Functions
Acknowledgement of faults
The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
• Faults can only be acknowledged
– when the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– there is no "ON" control command.
• No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of
the fault or an "ON" control command is still present. The reset is saved,
depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the
"GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change
from flashing to a continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
• A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user previously acknowledged fault)
• An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if motor protection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically after the
cooling down time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a reset
cannot occur if an ON command is present.
• If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically acknowledged. However, a configuration fault is generated (exception: operator panel
when parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not
cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.
• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor
cannot start immediately since no parameters can be entered if an ON command is present).
• If a function’s parameter is changed from "Switch off" to "Warn", "Signal" or
"Deactivated", all associated faults are automatically acknowledged.
• For an external fault: with its own parameter: "Auto reset".
Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 -
Description
Input
Activates the "Reset" function block from any signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button
locked
The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out
device tests.
The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They
can then be used for other purposes.
Table 10-4: Reset settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.3
Test Position Feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "test position
feedback (TPF)" function. The input (plug) of the function block must be connected to the corresponding socket. The active test position is indicated by
a flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - test position" socket
It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
• 1 "Fault - test position feedback fault" socket.
It is set when
– "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total there is
– 1 "Test position feedback" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control
function are controlled through blinking to indicate test operation, for
example, of the motor feeder via a blinking LED button.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test position feedback" function block:
TPF
Status Test position
Input
Type
Fault Feedback fault test position
Figure 10-3: "Test position feedback" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-7
Standard Functions
Cold starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the
network. However, the control voltage is connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is
defined as the testing of the motor feeder without current in the main circuit.
This function must be enabled via the socket to differentiate this function
from normal operation.
The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can
be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor feeder which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally
connected to the "Test position feedback (TPF)" plug of the function block.
When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is no longer needed. The "RMT" function module can be enabled by
monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage monitoring").
Following this, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see
chapter 4"Motor Control"), which enables the current-free status to be
tested.
If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are
switched off with the message "Fault - Test position feedback fault".
"Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Attention
"Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" is generated when:
• "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder
Acknowledge with "Reset".
Settings
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Description
Input
Controls the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block using any
, e.g. device input)
signal (arbitrary sockets
Type
Specifies the input logic
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.4
External Fault
Description
The "External faults 1-6" function blocks can optionally be used to monitor
any statuses and/or external devices and to create fault messages. In order
to do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External fault" function blocks must be
connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also be "labeled" in SIMOCODE pro.
This makes it easier to allocate them to the actual malfunction. Example:
monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external rotationalspeed monitor.
The "External fault" function block consists of
• 2 plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
• 1 "Event - external fault" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
In total there are:
– 4 "External faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1
– 6 "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External fault" function blocks:
External fault 1
External fault 2
Input
Input
Type
Activity
Reset
Type
Event Ext. fault 1
Response
Activity
Reset
Reset
(Marking)
External fault 3
Reset
External fault 4
Input
Type
Activity
Type
Event Ext. fault 3
Response
Activity
Reset
Reset
(Marking)
Event Ext. fault 4
Response
Reset
(Marking)
External fault 5
External fault 6
Input
Input
Type
Activity
Reset
Response
(Marking)
Input
Reset
Event Ext. fault 2
Type
Event Ext. fault 5
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Activity
Reset
Event Ext. fault 6
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Figure 10-4: "External fault" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-9
Standard Functions
Special reset options:
A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote
reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can
also be activated.
See below.
Settings
External fault
1 to 6 -
Description
Input
Activates the "External fault" function block using the monitored
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
signal (arbitrary sockets
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Specifies the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Activity
Specifies in which motor operating state the external fault should
be evaluated:
• Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary.
• only when the motor is ON:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.
Response
Specifies the response to an external fault when activated via the
input (see the following table and the chapter "Important Notes").
Reset
Acknowledges the "External fault" fault using any signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset also by
Specifying further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using
additional reset types:
• Test/Reset Buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel (panel
reset)
• Remote Reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"
command
• Auto-Reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has
been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)
• Off Command-Reset: "OFF" control command resets the fault.
Marking
No parameters. Optional markIng to designate the signal,
e.g. "Rotational speed >", e.g. using SIMOCODE ES.
Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.
Table 10-6: External fault settings
"External fault" response
Response
External fault
Tripping
X
Warning
X
Signalling
X (d)
Disabled
-
Table 10-7: "External fault" response
SIMOCODE pro
10-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.5
Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
10.5.1
Response for positioner control function
Description
The "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into
the safe mode. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to the
corresponding socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP,
etc.).
The "Operational protection off" function block consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - OPO" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
• 1 "Fault - OPO fault" socket. It is set when the corresponding safe end position is reached.
In total there is:
– 1 "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block for BU2.
The following table shows the main functionality:
OPO
Initial position when OPO occurs
Positioner is
open
Positioner
opens
Positioner
stopped/OFF
Positioner
closes
Positioner is
closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized
"Positioner
closed"
response
Fault Reset:
with close
command
Fault Reset:
with close
command
Fault Reset:
with close
command
-
Closes
Closes
Closes
Closes
-
Fault
Fault
Fault
Reset: with
Reset: with
Reset: with
open command open command open command
Opens
Opens
Parameterized "Positioner
open" response
Opens
-
Opens
Table 10-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for "positioner" control function
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational protection off (OPO)"
function block:
Operational protection off(OPO)
Input
Status Operational protection off (OPO)
Positioner response
Type
Fault Operational protection off (OPO)
Figure 10-5: "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-11
Standard Functions
Settings
Operational
protection off
(OPO)
Description
Input
Activates the "Operational protection off" function block using the
, e.g. device inputs, etc.)
monitored signal (arbitrary sockets
Positioner
response
Specifies the response for the "positioner" control function when
activated via the input:
• CLOSE: Positioner moves to the "Closed" end position
• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.
Type
Specifies the input logic
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-9: Operational protection off settings
Safety instructions
Note
No "Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)" fault message is created when
the "OPO" command tries to move the positioner to the end position which
it is already in or to the position towards which it is already heading.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while "Operational protection off (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Fault - Operation protection off (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged using the open or close control command, depending on the present
end position reached via "OPO".
Note
The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not
yet been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via the PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
10-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.5.2
Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if
OPO is used:
• The motor is running: The motor switches off with a "Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)" fault.
• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Fault - Operational protection off
(OPO)" fault only occurs when the "ON command" is issued.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-13
Standard Functions
10.6
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" is enabled via the plug. This is carried
out via an external voltage relay which is connected to the function block via
the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring relay/
activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.
2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within
the "Power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can be
additionally delayed (restart delay).
3) If the "Power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault).
Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not interrupted.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)"
function block:
UVO
Input*
Type
Fault Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Power failure time
Restart delay
*Activation
External power failure monitoring
Figure 10-6: Schematic of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block
1)
UVO
t
Power failure
time
2)
Power failure
time
QE
t
3)
Fault
Fault
t
Figure 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
SIMOCODE pro
10-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
Settings
Power failure
monitoring (UVO)
Description
Input
Activates the "Power failure monitoring" function block using the
, e.g. device inputs, control
monitored signal (arbitrary sockets
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Specifies the type of power failure monitoring:
• Deactivated
• Service supply is not interrupted.
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a
separate voltage relay (for example).
Power failure time
The time at which the power failure starts.
If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all
the drives that were connected before the power failure are automatically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure UVO" fault
message is generated.
The fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset" once the
mains voltage returns.
Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds
Restart delay (stag- The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the
gered)
same time (mains voltage would otherwise collapse again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds
Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-15
Standard Functions
10.7
Emergency start
Description
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro
each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after
an overload tripping. This function can be used to:
– Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload
switch-off
– delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation if required.
Caution
If emergency starts are carried out too frequently, this could lead to thermal
overloading of the motor!
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this
function to continuously affect the thermal motor model.
The emergency start is carried out as follows:
• Via the plug of the function block. In order to do this, the input (plug) of the
function block must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The "Emergency start" function block consists of:
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - emergency start carried out" socket. It is set when the emergency
start is carried out.
In total there is:
– 1 "Emergency start" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:
Emergency start
Input
Status Emergency start
carried out 1)
1) The "Emergency start carried out" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset
when current flows again.
Figure 10-8: "Emergency start" function block
Settings
Emergency start
Input
Description
Activates the "Emergency start" function block using any signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs,
control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 10-11: Emergency start settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.8
Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors both the communication with the
PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating state of the PLC in the
"Remote" operating mode.
Schematic
Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - Bus" fault is generated if
• "Bus monitoring" is active
• The cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted,
e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
• The "Status - Bus O.K." can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is
cyclically exchanging data with the PLC, the "Status - Bus O.K." is set to "1".
PLC/DCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, "Fault - PLC/DCS" is generated if
• "PLC/DCS monitoring" is activated.
• The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
• The "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP
is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/DCS monitoring - input" is connected by default to the "Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.
Watchdog (Bus monit.) PLC/DCS
Cyclic communication
Bus/PLC fault - reset
Bus monitoring
PLC/DCS monitoring
PLC/DCS monitoring - input
(level sensitive)
Status - PLC/DCS in Run
Status - Bus O.K. (bus is active)
Fault - bus
Fault - PLC/DCS
Bus response
Figure 10-9: "Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS)" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-17
Standard Functions
Settings
Watchdog -
Description
PLC/DCS monitoring - input
Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus monitoring
• Activated:
If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated,
which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
PLC/DCS
monitoring
• Activated:
If an SPS fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/DCS" fault message is
generated, which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
Bus/PLC fault reset
You can select whether the faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.
Range: Manual/automatic
Table 10-12: Watchdog settings
"Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response
Response
Bus fault
PLC/DCS fault
Tripping
X
X
Warning
-
-
Signalling
-
-
Disabled
X (d)
X (d)
Table 10-13: "Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response
SIMOCODE pro
10-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Standard Functions
10.9
Timestamping
10.9.1
Timestamping in the fault memory
The timestamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours
(resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Mains on" events are recorded. Each of these events is
annotated with a timestamp.
• Error/Fault:
The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge)
is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded.
• Mains on:
If the most recent entry was "Mains on", this is not recorded multiple times.
Instead, the fault number is used as a mains-on counter. This means that the
fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data is displayed using the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Screenshot
Figure 10-10: Example of event recording using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10-19
Standard Functions
Schematic
The standard function "Timestamping" consists of
• 8 sockets "Timestamping - input 0 to input 7".
In total there is:
• 1 "Timestamp" function block for BU2.
Input 0
Input 1
Timestamp
Timestamping active
Signal - timestamp function active+O.K.
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Figure 10-11: "Timestamp" function block
Settings
You can activate/deactivate the timestamping function via the "Timestamping active" checkbox.
10.9.2
Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS
See chapter 12.8 "Timestamping".
SIMOCODE pro
10-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of
SIMOCODE pro. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not
only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on
counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can
use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions
and counter functions without being dependent on external components
(relays).
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Logic modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-1
Logic Modules
11.1
Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input
signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their internal logic components. Logic modules can contain:
• plugs
• an internal logic component
• sockets
)
• settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Plug 1
Logic module
Plug 1 - n
(Logic component)
Plug n
Setting value
Figure 11-1: General representation of a logic module
Extent and application
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE pro
Logic module
pro C
BU1
pro V
BU2
Number
Number
Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output
3
6
Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output
—
2
Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs
—
1
Timers
2
4
Counters
2
4
Signal conditioners
2
4
Non-volatile elements
2
4
Flashing
3
3
Flickering
3
3
Limit monitor
—
4
Table 11-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
SIMOCODE pro
11-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11.2
Truth Table for 3I/1O
Description
The truth table for 3I/1O contains
• 3 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 3 truth tables 1 to 3 for BU1
– 6 truth tables 1 to 6 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules:
Input 1
Input 1
Truth table 1 for 3I/1O
Output
Input 2
Input 3
Input 1
Input 1
Truth table 3 for 3I/1O
Output
Input 3
Input 2
Output
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Truth table 2 for 3I/1O
Input 2
Truth table 4 for 3I/1O
Output
Input 2
Input 3
Input 1
Truth table 5 for 3I/1O
Output
Input 3
Input 2
Truth table 6 for 3I/1O
Output
Input 3
Figure 11-2: "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-3
Logic Modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
Circuit:
S1
S2
S3
K1
K1 switches with:
(S1 or S2) and S3
or
S1 and S2 and S3
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
S3=
Input 3
K1=
Output
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
Figure 11-3: Example of a truth table
SIMOCODE pro
11-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
Switching and parameterizing
L1
N
Circuit:
K1
BU - inputs
BU - outputs
BU
1
S1
1
Input 1
S2
2
Input 2
Truth table 1 for 3I/1O
Output
2
Out1
3
S3
3
Input 3
4
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Setting of bits
for output signals
Connecting inputs, i.e.
connecting the plugs with the sockets
Figure 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3E/1A
Settings
Truth tables 1-6 for
3I/1O Input 1 to 3
Description
Activate the truth table with any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 11-2: Settings for truth table for 3I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-5
Logic Modules
11.3
Truth Table for 2I/1O
Description
The truth table for 2I/1O contains
• 2 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
You can choose between 4 possible input conditions with which you want to
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 2I/1O" logic modules:
Input 1
Input 1
Truth table 7 for 2I/1O
Truth table 8 for 2I/1O
Output
Output
Input 2
Input 2
Figure 11-5: "Truth table for 2I/1O" logic modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit:
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1
S2
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
K1=
Output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
K1 K1 switches with:
S1 or S2
Figure 11-6: Example of truth table for 2I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
11-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11.4
Truth Table for 5I/2O
Description
The truth table for 5I/2O contains
• 5 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 2 sockets.
You can choose between 32 possible input conditions with which you want
to create up to 2 output signals.
In total there is:
– 1 truth table 9 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 5I/2O" logic modules:
Input 1
Truth table 9 for 5I/2O
Input 2
Output 1
Input 3
Input 4
Output 2
Input 5
Figure 11-7: "Truth table for 5I/2O" logic modules
Settings
Truth table 9 for
5I/2O Input 1 to 5
Description
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 11-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-7
Logic Modules
11.5
Counters
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the plugs "+2" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The
counter is reset with "Reset".
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
• Plug +: increases actual value by 1 (maximum: limit value)
• Plug –:decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0)
• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.
The counter contains
• 3 plugs (input +, input – and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
• 1 "actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between
0 up to the limit value. It remains constant in the case of a voltage failure.
In total there are:
• 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1
• 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counters" logic modules:
Input +
Input –
Reset
Input +
Limit value
Output
Input –
Actual value
Reset
Input +
Counter 3
Input –
Reset
Input +
Counter 1
Limit value
Output
Input –
Actual value
Reset
Counter 2
Output
Limit value
Actual value
Counter 4
Output
Limit value
Actual value
Figure 11-8: "Counters" logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
Safety instructions
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on
- the input delay
- the device cycle time-.
Note
The actual value remains the same
- during parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
- if there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
Settings
Counters 1 to 4 -
Description
Input +
Increases the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Input –
Decreases the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset
Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Limit value
The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter provides an output signal.
Range: 0 - 65535
Table 11-4: Counter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-9
Logic Modules
11.6
Timer
Description
The timer contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 socket.
• 1 "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal according
to the chosen timer type:
• With closing delay
• With closing delay with memory
• With OFF delay
• With fleeting closing.
In total there are:
– 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:
Input
Input
Timer 1
Timer 2
Output
Output
Type
Reset
Value
Input
Type
Actual value
Reset
Value
Input
Timer 3
Timer 4
Output
Output
Type
Reset
Value
Actual value
Type
Actual value
Reset
Value
Actual value
Figure 11-9: "Timer" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
SIMOCODE pro
11-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
Output response
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t
t
Output
With closing delay with memory:
Input
Reset
Time
t
t
t
Output
With OFF delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t
t
t
Output
With fleeting closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Figure 11-10: Output response of the timer
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-11
Logic Modules
Settings
Timers 1 to 4 -
Description
Input
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset
Resets the actual value to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Different output responses
Range: Closing delay, closing delay with memory
Closing delay, with fleeting closing
Value
Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output response (type).
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 11-5: Timer settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11.7
Signal Conditioner
Description
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
according to the chosen timer type:
• Not inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioner contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)
– 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioner" logic modules:
Input
Input
Signal conditioner 1
Signal conditioner 2
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Input
Type
Input
Signal conditioner 3
Signal conditioner 4
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Type
Figure 11-11: "Signal conditioner" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-13
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Level inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Edge rising with memory
Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory
Input
Reset
Output
Figure 11-12: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners
SIMOCODE pro
11-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:
Input
Reset
Output
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
Schematic
Input
Reset
>
=
1
Output
Table 11-6: NOR function
Settings
Signal
conditioners
1 to 4 -
Description
Input
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset
Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Different output responses
Range:
Level not inverted, level inverted,
Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-15
Logic Modules
11.8
Non-volatile Elements
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.
The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
according to the type of signal conditioner chosen:
• Not inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:
Input
Input
Non-vol. elem. 1
Non-vol. elem. 2
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Input
Type
Input
Non-vol. elem. 1
Non-vol. elem. 2
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Type
Figure 11-13: "Non-volatile elements" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
SIMOCODE pro
11-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Level inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Edge rising with memory
Voltage failure,
Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory
Voltage failure,
Input
Reset
Output
Figure 11-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-17
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:
Input
Reset
Output
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
Schematic
Input
Reset
>
=
1
Output
Table 11-8: NOR function
Settings
Non-volatile
elements
1 to 4 -
Description
Input
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset
Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Different output responses
Range: Level not inverted, level inverted,
Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-9: Non-volatile elements settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11.9
Flashing
Description
If there is an input signal at its plug, the "Flashing" function block provides a
signal at its socket, which alternates between
binary 0 and 1 with a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the
LEDs on the operator panel flash.
The logic module consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 3 "Flashing 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:
Flashing 1
Flashing 2
Output
Input
Input
Output
Flashing 3
Output
Input
Figure 11-15: "Flashing" logic modules
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 Input
Description
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)
Table 11-10: Flashing settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-19
Logic Modules
11.10
Flickering
Description
With the "flickering" function blocks, you can e.g. assign the "flickering"
function to the operator panel LEDs.
If there is an input signal, the "Flickering" function block provides an output
signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.
The function block contains
• 1 plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 3 "Flickering 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:
Flickering 1
Flickering 2
Output
Input
Input
Output
Flickering 3
Output
Input
Figure 11-16: "Flickering" logic modules
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 Input
Description
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
e.g. signals, etc.)
Table 11-11: Flickering settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
11.11
Limit Monitor
Description
Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limiting overshooting or undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit value" signal to its
socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "labeled" according to their
function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of
the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of
• 1 analog plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:
Limit monitor 1
Limit monitor 2
Event Limit value 1
Type
Input
Limit value
Limit value
Activity
Activity
Response
Response
(Marking)
(Marking)
Limit monitor 3
Limit monitor 4
Event Limit value 3
Type
Input
Type
Input
Limit value
Type
Input
Limit value
Activity
Activitiy
Response
Response
(Marking)
(Marking)
Event Limit value 2
Event Limit value 4
Figure 11-17: "Limit monitor" logic modules
Response
Response
Tripping
Limit values 1 to 4
-
Warning
-
Signalling
X (d)
Disabled
Delay
0 - 25.5 s
Table 11-12: Response of the limit values
See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-21
Logic Modules
Functional principle
The limit value signal issued depends on
• the operating state of the motor
• the TPF function
• the parametrized "activity":
– ON
– On+
– Run
– Run+.
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity" parameters.
Activity
Class-time
OFF
Start
Motor is running
OFF
"ON"
Not with TPF 1)
"On+"
Not with TPF 1)
"Run"
Not with TPF 1)
"Run+"
Time
1) TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test position, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.
Figure 11-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor
SIMOCODE pro
11-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Logic Modules
Settings
Limit monitor -
Description
Input
Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog
value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.).
Type
Specifies if the limit value has to be monitored for overshooting or
undershooting.
Activity
Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to
be evaluated:
• on, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is running or not (default)
• on+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.
• run, i.e., evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF)
• run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is not
issued) and there is no test position feedback (TPF);
Example: Monitoring the power factor.
Limit value
Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by
the "Limit monitor - delay" parameter.
Range: 0 - 65535.
Delay
Specifies the time period for which the limit value must be constantly exceeded before the "Signal - limit" output is set.
Range: 0 - 25.5 s
(Marking)
No parameters. Optional marking to designate the signal,
e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.
Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11-23
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMOCODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control,
signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that
the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent. Otherwise,
you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your application.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device parameters > Bus parameters
Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic signaling data
Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic signaling data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-1
Communication
12.1
Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized
periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central DP master and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data
exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data
exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical
class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2
masters are, for example,
• PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software
• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
• PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD (device data)
Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the
DP slave in a DP master system.
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is
installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning
and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and
SIMOCODE pro
12-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7. It is
connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic
alarms, process alarms)
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-3
Communication
12.2
Transmitting Data
Options for data transfer
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Class 1 master
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor
Class 2 master
PC or programming device with
SIMOCODE ES Professional
Maximum of 2 class 2
masters possible
Data transfer to class 1 master,
depending on the slave mode of
operation: (table below, "Slave
modes of operation")
PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,
diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
PC/PD e.g. with SIMOCODE ES Smart
Parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling,
signaling, testing via system interface
Figure 12-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle in which different
data is transmitted depending on the master and slave modes of operation:
Master Class 1
cyclic I/O
Master Class 2 (Max. 2)
PLC-CPU
acyclic
acyclic
acyclic
PC or DCS
e.g.
SIMOCODE ES
Professional
PLC
Communication processor
Configuration
GSD
Start-up
parameter
block
SIMOCODE pro
Diagnostics
3UF7
Alarms
Parameters
Data records
Data records
DPV0
Cyclic signalling data
Cyclic control data
DPV1
DPV1
Figure 12-2: Communication principle
SIMOCODE pro
12-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.3
Telegram Description and Data Access
12.3.1
Cyclic Data
The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the
PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module
then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master
module.
Access to the cyclic data is via the inputs (signaling data) and outputs (control data) in the program of the PLC.
The length of the cyclic data which is to be transmitted is already set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by
selecting the basic type which determines the structure and the length of
the cyclic data.
The following basic types are available:
• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Specification
Basic type 1
Length
4 bytes of control data
Specification
Cyclic receive Bit 0.0 to 1.7
Cyclic receive analog value
Basic type 2
2 bytes of control data
Cyclic receive Bit 0.0 to 1.7
Information
BU2
BU1/BU2
Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:
Specification
Basic type 1
Length
Specification
10 bytes of signaling data Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
Cyclic Send analog inputs 1 to 4
Basic type 2
4 bytes of signaling data
Cyclic Send Bit 0.0 to 1.7
Cyclic Send analog input 1
Information
BU2
BU1/BU2
Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master
The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by parameterization, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control
functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software
is selected (see chapter B.20 "Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling
Data for Predefined Control Functions").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-5
Communication
12.3.2
Diagnostic Data and Alarms
The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of
SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
• Standard diagnostics
• Status messages
• Channel-related diagnostics
• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.
Configuration of the diagnostic response
For SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events are to trigger the
transmission of diagnostic data or the alarms to the PLC:
• Diagnostics for device errors, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
• Diagnostics for process faults:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with an "F"
• Diagnostics for process warnings:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "W"
• Diagnostics for process messages:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "M".
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Set the response in the "Device parameters > Bus parameters > Diagnostics" dialog.
SIMOCODE pro
12-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.3.3
Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Station status 1 to 3
Byte 3
Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4
Byte 5
High byte
Low byte
Byte 6
Byte 7
Identification-related diagnostics
Byte 8
.
.
.
Byte 27
Standard
diagnostics
Manufacturer's ID
Status messages
Byte 28
Byte 29
Byte 30
Channel-related diagnostics
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 31
Byte 32
Byte 33
Channel-related diagnostics
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 28+n
.
.
.
Byte 48+n
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Byte 28+n
.
.
.
Byte 48+n
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Extended
diagnostics
Figure 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics
The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-7
Communication
Station status - definition
The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit
Meaning
Cause/corrective measures
0
The DP slave cannont be addressed
by the DP master.
Check the following:
• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
the DP slave?
• Is the bus connection plug plugged in?
• Is the DP slave supplied with power?
• Is the RS-485 repeater configured correctly?
1
The DP slave is not yet ready for the The DP slave is just starting up.
Wait until the start-up is completed.
data transfer.
2
The configuration data sent from the Check whether the correct station type or
DP master to the DP slave does not the correct configuation of the DP slave has
correspond to the configuration of
been entered in the configuration software.
the DP slave.
3
There are external diagnostics present (general diagnostic display).
Evaluate the identification-related diagnostics, the status messages and/or the channel-related diagnostics.
As soon as all errors are rectified, bit 3 is
reset. The bit is reset if there is a new diagnostic message in the bytes of the abovementioned diagnostics.
4
The required function cannot interpret the response of the DP slave
Check the configuration.
5
The DP master cannot interpret the
response of the DP slave.
Check the bus configuration.
6
The DP slave type does not correEnter the correct station type in the confispond to the software configuration. guration software.
7
The DP slave has been parameterized by another DP master (not by
the DP master which has access to
the DP slave at the moment).
Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing
the DP slave from the programming device
or from another DP master.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
which parameterized the DP slave is in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic
byte.
Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)
SIMOCODE pro
12-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
Station status 2
Bit
Meaning
0
The DP slave must be parameterized anew.
1
There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is rectified (static diagnostic message).
2
The bit is always "1" when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address.
3
The address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
4
The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).
5
The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).
6
0: Bit is always "0".
7
The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.
Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for slave diagnostics.
Bit
0 to 7
Meaning
Bits are always "0".
Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3
Master PROFIBUS address - definition
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte:
• which the DP slave parameterized and
• which has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
Manufacturer's identification - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the
DP slave type.
Byte 4
80H
Byte 5
FDH
Manufacturer's identification for
SIMOCODE pro
Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-9
Communication
Identification-related diagnostics - definition
The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related diagnostics - Configuration
7 6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
= 0x42
Length of the identification-related diagnostics
including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for identification-related diagnostics
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
GSD (device data)
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0
OM SIMOCODE pro
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
Figure 12-4: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
12-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
Status messages - definition
The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
Status messages - configuration
The status messages are configured as follows:
Byte 8
7 6 5
0 Bit number
= 0x14
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Length of the status message
including byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 9
0
0x81
7
0
Byte 10
x
Byte 11
0x00
7
Status message
Slot number
GSD (device data):
0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
..
.
Byte 12
Detailed messages
Byte 27
Figure 12-5: Status messages configuration
The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the
Slave Diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-11
Communication
Channel-related diagnostics - definition
Channel-related diagnostics are a detailed version of the identification-related diagnostics. They supply information about the device errors of
SIMOCODE pro.
Channel-related diagnostics - configuration
The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:
7
6 5
Byte 28 1 0 0 0 0 0 x
0 Bit number
x
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Code for channel-related diagnostics
7 6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 29 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 30 0 0 0
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)
Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 31 to
Byte 33
Next channel-related diagnostics message
(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30)
Figure 12-6: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics
The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes,
is either missing (if there are no channel-related diagnostics) or is available
once or twice.
Error types
The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.
No.
Error type
Meaning/cause
F9
01001:
Error
• Internal error/device error
• Error during self-test
F16
10000:
Parameterization
error
• Incorrect parameter value
Exact information: See
chapter B.7 "Data Record
92 - Device Diagnostics".
Table 12-7: Error types
SIMOCODE pro
12-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
Alarms
Alarms - diagnostic alarm
Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic
alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Diagnostic alarm - configuration
The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
= 0x14
Length of the diagnostic alarm
including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 29+n
0
Diagnostic alarm
0x01
7
0
Byte 30+n
x
Byte 31+n
0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
GSD (device data):
0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
Bit number
Byte 32+n
Contents of data record 1
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Figure 12-7: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm
The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or
6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagnostics.
You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data
record 1 in chapter B.2 "Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-13
Communication
Alarms - process alarm
Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process
alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm
is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Process alarm - configuration
The process alarm is configured as follows:
7 6 5
0
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Bit number
= 0x14
Length of the process alarm
including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 29+n
0
Process alarm
0x02
7
0
Byte 30+n
x
Byte 31+n
0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
GSD (device data):
0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
Bit number
Byte 32+n
Detailed messages
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Figure 12-8: Configuration of the process alarm
The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes
depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagnostics.
The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the
Slave Diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
12-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.4
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems
12.4.1
Slave Modes of Operation
The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation
which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
Class 1 master
SIMOCODE pro
connected as:
DP master
manufacturerindependent,
without DPV1 alarms
• DPV1 slave
• Cyclic data transfer
via GSD (device • Standard diagnodata)
stics
• Status messages
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records (if supported by the
master)
• S7 slave via
OM
SIMOCODE pro
DP master
manufacturerindependent,
with DPV1 alarms
S7 master
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagnostics
• Status messages
• Process and diagnostic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagnostics
• Status messages
• Process and diagnostic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
—
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagnostics
• Process and diagnostic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
—
Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro
12.4.2
Preparing the Data Transfer
A connection according to Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of
SIMOCODE pro as well as the setting of the PROFIBUS-DP address are
required for communication with the class 1 master (OLC).
See chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" for more information about setting the address.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-15
Communication
12.4.3
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD in the
Configuration Software
SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the
GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• From the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd ( -> Product
Support)
• Via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972.
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C :
• SI0180FD.GSG (German)
• SI0180FD.GSE (English).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V :
• SI1180FD.GSG (German)
• SI1180FD.GSE (English).
Attention
If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g.
timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.5 such
as e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7
and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2
1
Start STEP 7 and call the menu command
"Extras > Install new GSD file" in the HW configuration.
2
In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with "OK" --> The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the
"PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Further field devices > Switching devices
> SIMOCODE pro".
3
Insert "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4
Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
5
Check the set DP alarm mode
(DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the
alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and
chapter 12.8 "Timestamping").
6
Ony for SIMOCODE pro C:
It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every start-up in the object properties
under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see chapter 12.7.3
"Starting up Parameter Data").
Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the Configuration Software
SIMOCODE pro
12-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.4.4
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via
GSD) in STEP7-HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM-Objekt in the STEP7HW Config as of version 6.0 + SP1 of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device
Manager) software. The PDM option "Integration in STEP 7" is required for
this.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a
PDM objekt in the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2
1
Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".
2
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate in the hardware
catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices" directory.
3
Insert
"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or
"SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
4
Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the
DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the
alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and chapter 12.8
"Timestamping").
5
Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on
the slave symbol (see chapter 12.7.2 "SIMATIC PDM").
Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV-1 slave via GSD)
in STEP7-HW Config
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-17
Communication
12.4.5
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advantages of SIMOCODE ES Professional to parameterize SIMOCODE pro from
the STEP7-HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of delivery of the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software.
Install the corresponding software.
The follwoing table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in
the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP 7
1
Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".
2
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware
catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices > Motor Management
System" directory.
3
Insert
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or
SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" oder "basic type 2"
as module.
4
Start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to create the device
parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object
properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The parameters created are accepted
in STEP 7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro for every
start-up (see chapter 12.7.3 "Starting up Parameter Data").
Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
12-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.5
Evaluating Diagnostic Data
The way in which the diagnostic data is read out depends on which
DP master system you have integrated in SIMOCODE pro and how the integration was carried out (see chapter 12.4 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in
the DP master systems").
12.5.1
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
The DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode) (e.g. all newer
SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The diagnostic data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in DP
master systems with DPV1 alarm support.
A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool (diagnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been caried
out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the
properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP 7 this is carried out in HW-Config via the properties of the DP slave.
• Response and process in STEP 7
A diagnostic alarm (OB82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of
a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new
diagnosis of porcess faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not
programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parameter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagnostic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of the FB
"RALRM" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
The DP master without DPV1 Alarm Support (DPV1 Alarm Mode) (e.g. all newer
SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP Master Systems)
The SIMOCODE pro diagnostic data can be evaluated via device-specific
diagnostics (status messages) as well as channel-related diagnostics as part
of extended diagnostics in DP master systems (see chapter 12.3.3 "Diagnostic alarm - configuration").
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.
The device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about
faults, warnings and events which are recorded by the process via
SIMOCODE pro, while information about faults which concern the hardware
of the device are transmitted via the channel-related diagnostics.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-19
Communication
• Response and process in STEP 7:
The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnosis (diagnosis of device
errors, diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events). If the OB 82 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Reading out the slave diagnostics with STEP 7:
It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostic data by evaluating the start information of the OB82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable).
OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the
slave in the HW Config. The diagnostic data is then read e.g. in the cyclic part
of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".
The diagnostic data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the configuration described in chapter 12.3.3 "Diagnostic alarm - configuration".
You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.
12.5.2
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
The diagnostic data about the diagnostic alarms and process alarms is transmitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an
S7 slave.
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/
400 DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP 7:
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40
is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7:
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parameter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagnostic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC
S7-300/400 DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP 7:
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40
is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
You will find more information about device errors in the start information of
the OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.
The data written in the bytes 32 to 35 of the process alarm is contained in
the "OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable in the start information of the OB 40 (see
section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagnostic Data and
Alarms"). The reading of all diagnostics can e.g. be initiated from the OB 40,
while the complete diagnostic data record 92 is read e.g. in the cyclic user
program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".
You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
12-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.6
Data Records
Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can
only be read or partly written.
These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via cyclic DPV1
services. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and parameterize SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will
find an overview of the data records available from SIMOCODE pro in chapter B "Data Formats and Data Records".
Unlike access to cyclic I/O data, special function blocks must be started in
the user program in the PLC for access to the DPV1 data records.
Access to data records in STEP 7
Reading and writing access to data records is gained by starting the system
functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or at the CPU which supports the "DPV1" mode with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC"
and SFB 53 "WRREC".
Note
The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to
the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline
PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC
61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online
help.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-21
Communication
12.7
Parameterization via PROFIBUS
12.7.1
SIMOCODE ES Professional
With SIMOCODE ES Professional you can parameterize all the
SIMOCODE pro devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP
network from a central location. Parameter data which has been previously
created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly via
PROFIBUS DP to SIMOCODE pro.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512
or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g.
transmitting of SIMOCODE pro parameters.
The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated together with SIMOCODE ES Professional as a class 2 master and use acyclic
DPV1 communication functions for the communication with
SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.
12.7.2
SIMATIC PDM
The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with
a comparable functionality for parameterization of SIMOCODE pro via
PROFIBUS as with SIMOCODE ES Professional.
The following additional functions are available with the PDM option "Integration in STEP 7":
• "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and
manual transmission (no automatic transmission of parameter data at startup!)
• "Routing via S7 stations".
Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a data
record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with different networks.
Attention
The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC-PDM
manual.
SIMOCODE pro
12-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
12.7.3
Starting up Parameter Data
For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP, parameters are
transmitted to the device.
Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either
standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific parameters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transmitted. The parameters are
saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transmitted automatically to
the DP slave at the systemstart-up.
You can set the device-specific parameters
• with the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with
STEP7-HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The
SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by setting the device-specific parameters in the slave properties.
• in the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software during the integration of
SIMOCODE pro in STEP7 HW Konfig as a S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.
This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can
start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to conveniently create the
parameterization from STEP7-HW Konfig with the button in the "Parameter"
tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Attention
In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization at start-up, the
start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must remain
unset.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters
stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are overwritten.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-23
Communication
12.8
Timestamping
Prerequisite:
To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master used must support
the time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e g. DP master interface
connections for SIMATIC S7-400) or a time master (e.g. SICLOCK) must be
used.
Process in STEP 7
The time synchronization activation for SIMOCODE pro V is carried out in
STEP 7 HW Konfig in the slave properties unter "Time synchronization".
Attention
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the
time master.
In SIMOCODE pro the transmission of time-stamped information occurs in
analogy to the transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.
For this reason, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block for the transmission
of time-stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous
Blocks" library can be used for further processing of time-stamped information in the CPU.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave
from STEP 7 HW Konfig.
LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the
DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). In
all other configurations LADDR2 contains the same address as LADDR.
You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.
Timestamping in the fault memory
See chapter 10.9 "Timestamping".
SIMOCODE pro
12-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12-25
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro
components are mounted and wired.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• mechanics
• electricians
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-1
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.1
General Information about Mounting and Wiring
Safety instructions
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and
burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Fixing lugs for screw attachments
Attention
For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attachments:
For basic units and expansion modules:
Order No. 3RP1903
For current measuring modules,
45 mm and 55 mm width:
Order No. 3RP1900-0B
Removable terminals
Attention
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
SIMOCODE pro
13-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.2
Mounting
13.2.1
Basic Units and Expansion Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring
tools
• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules with a
width of 45 mm and 55 mm (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting
rail
• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903) and screws on a
level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Expansion module
with increased mounting depth
BU1
BU2
Snap-on mounting onto the current measuring module
e.g. 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1
Standard mounting rails
Screw attachment
3RP1903
Ø 5 mm
3RP1903
Ø 5 mm
Figure 13-1: Mounting the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-3
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.2.2
Current Measuring Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Current measuring module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current measuring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For the current
measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spacer.
• Current measuring module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment.
• Current measuring module up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7000-1AU00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A up to 100 A
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Snap-on mounting
55 mm width
45 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
25 mm spacer
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A up to 630 A
Screw attachment
Figure 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
13-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.2.3
Current/voltage Measuring Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1903-0B)
and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the
current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring modules)! For the
current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional
25 mm long spacer.
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment.
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7101-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
10 A up to 100 A
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Snap-on mounting
55 mm width
45 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7101-1AA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
25 mm spacer
3UF7104-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A up to 630 A
Screw attachment
Figure 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-5
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.2.4
Operator Panel
The operator panel is designed to be installed e.g. in the front panel of
motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors. For this, carry out the
following steps:
Step
Description
1
Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. See diagram for dimensions.
2
Place the operator panel in the cutout.
3
Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4
Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the
mounting bracket.
Table 13-1: Procedure for mounting an operator panel
Operator panel
Mounting bracket
4x
90+0.5
30+0.5
Cutout
Front panel
Switchgear
cabinet door
etc.
Figure 13-4: Mounting the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
13-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.3
Wiring
13.3.1
Basic Units and Expansion Modules
Basic units and expansion modules have removable terminals. You do not
have to detach the wiring to replace the components!
Removable terminals
Basic units
Expansion modules
D
D
C
C
A
A
A, C, D: coded
Figure 13-5: Removable terminals for basic units and expansion modules
Attention
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
Cables
The cable cross section is the same for all devices. The following table
shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals
Screwdriver
PZ2/
Ø 5 mm - 6 mm
Strip lengths
Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB
0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm
Cable cross-section
10
Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /
1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
10
Stranded
with/without
end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 -0.06 in2 /
1x 0.5 mm2 -0.10 in2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-2: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-7
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit
You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
• a): 24 V DC internal.
• b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.
3 inputs are available.
• c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply
voltage of 24 V DC!
a)
b)
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable
c)
24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU - inputs
Basic unit (BU)
BU - inputs
BU - inputs
IN1
1
IN1
1
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN2
2
IN2
2
IN3
3
IN3
3
IN3
3
IN4
4
IN4
4
IN4
4
(not usable)
24 V DC
A1
A2
Only possible for the basic unit with a
supply voltage of 24 V DC !
Figure 13-6: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
SIMOCODE pro
13-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Basic unit pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
1
Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2
2
Relay output OUT1
3
Relay output OUT2
4
Digital input IN3
5
Digital input IN4
3 4 IN3 IN4 5
T2
6 OUT3 7 24 V8 9 IN1 IN2 10 T1
ϑ
SIMOCODE pro
Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
DEVICE
6
Relay output OUT3
7
Relay output OUT3
8
24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9
Digital input IN 1
10
Digital input IN2
T1
Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
BUS
GEN. FAULT
TEST/
RESET
PROFIBUS DP
T2
1 OUT1 2 .2
Lower terminals
A1
Pin 1 supply voltage
A2
Pin 2 supply voltage
A
PROFIBUS DP Pin A
B
PROFIBUS DP Pin B
SPE/PE
A1
A2
A
B SPE/PE
Shielded/PE
Table 13-3: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the basic unit
Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of basic units
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2
If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP, place the PROFIBUS DP
cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal.
Attention
The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud
rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
3
Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Table 13-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-9
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit
b)
a)
T1
T2
9
IN1
10
IN2
4
IN3
5
IN4
8
24 V
1
OUT1
2
OUT2
3
Device
Bus
Gen. Fault
6
OUT3
7
PROFIBUS DP
A1
A2
B
A
max. 1.5 MBd
SPE/PE
Figure 13-7: Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
13-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Supplying the inputs of the digital module
• Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
• Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.
24 V DC external
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital module (DM)
Digital module (DM)
DM - inputs
N/M
N/M
DM - inputs
~
IN1
1
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN2
2
IN3
3
IN3
3
IN4
4
IN4
4
Figure 13-8: Supplying the inputs of the digital module
Digital module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
20
Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2
21
Relay output OUT1
22
Relay output OUT2
23
Digital input IN1
24
Digital input IN2
25
N/M for IN1 to IN4
20
OUT1 21 .2 22
23 IN1 IN2 24
25
Lower terminals
26
Digital input IN3
27
Digital input IN4
PE
PE
READY
26 IN3 IN4 27
PE
Table 13-5: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-11
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module
~
23 IN1
24 IN2
26 IN3
27 IN4
AC
+
DC
–
25 N/M
20
21
OUT1
Ready
22
OUT2
PE
Figure 13-9: Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module
SIMOCODE pro
13-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Earth-fault module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
40
Input C1 - Summation current transformer
40 C1
43
Input C2 - Summation current transformer
43 C2
Lower terminals
PE
PE
READY
EM
3UF7 500–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
*Exx*
PE
Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth-fault module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-13
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module
L1
L2
L3
N
Z2
3UL22
Z1
*)
*) Cable shielding recommended.
40 43
C1 C2
Ready
PE
Figure 13-10: Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module
SIMOCODE pro
13-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Temperature module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connectio
n
Assignment
Upper terminals
50
Input T3, temperature sensor 1
51
Input T3, temperature sensor 2
52
Input T3, temperature sensor 3
53
Input T3, temperature sensor 1
54
Input T3, temperature sensor 2
55
Input T3, temperature sensor 3
50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3
53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2
Lower terminals
56
Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57
Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
PE
Shielded/PE
READY
TM
3UF7 700–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
56
T1
57
*Exx*
PE
Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.
• 2-wire temperature sensors:
Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminal.
• 3-wire temperature sensors.
Doubly assign terminals 56 and 57 if three sensors are used.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-15
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module
3 x max.
1)
3 x max.
2)
ϑ
*)
ϑ
*) Cable shielding recommended.
*)
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
53 50 54 51 55 52
1T2
1T3
2T2
2T3
3T2
3T3
Ready
T1 T1
56 57
PE
Temperature sensor NTC:
NTC Type: B 57227-K333-A1
Q 63022-K7182-S1
R
J
Figure 13-11: Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module
SIMOCODE pro
13-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Analog module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
30
Analog input IN1+
31
Analog input IN2+
33
Analog input IN1+
34
Analog input IN2+
30 IN1 31 IN2+
33 IN1- 34 IN2-
Lower terminals
36
Analog output OUT+
37
Analog output OUT+
PE
PE
READY
AM
3UF7 400–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
*Exx*
36 +OUT- 37 PE
Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-17
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module
L+
2 x max.
IIN (0/4 mA - 20 mA)
+
M
*)
IN1
IN2+
30 33
IN1IN231 34
IN1+ IN1- IN2+ IN2Ready
OUT+ OUT36
37
PE
*)
+
RL
-
*) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m,
Cable shielding required for over 30 m
IOUT (0/4 A - 20 mA)
RL < 500 Ohm
Figure 13-12: Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module
Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of expansion modules
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2
Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
Table 13-9: Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion module
SIMOCODE pro
13-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.3.2
Current Measuring Modules
The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding current measuring module that should be chosen for current measuring:
• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed
through the push-through openings.
• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection
to Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the different current measuring modules:
Current measuring module
3UF7000-1AU00-0
0.3 A -3 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
Main current connections
Push-through system
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 14 mm
Ø
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A -200 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A -200 A
Pin cross section:
16 mm² - 95 mm²,
AWG 5 to 3/0
L1
L2
L3
N
L1 L2 L3
Rail connection
system
T1 T2 T3
M
3~
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A -630 A
Pin cross section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-10: Current measuring modules
Attention
Pay attention to the correct assignment and the correct routing direction
when connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main circuit!
Follow the information in the operating instructions!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-19
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.3.3
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding current/voltage measuring module that should be chosen for current/voltage
measuring:
• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed
through the push-through openings.
• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection
to Siemens contactors.
The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modules:
Current/voltage measuring module
3UF7101-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
Connection
Main circuit
Push-through system
3UF7111-1AA00-0
2.4 A -25 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 14 mm
L1
L2
L3
N
3UF7101-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 25 mm
3UF7113-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Pin cross section:
16 mm² - 95 mm²,
AWG 6 to 3/0
L1 L2 L3
Rail connection
system
L1 L2
L3
T1 T2 T3
M
3~
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Pin cross section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-11: Current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
13-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Safety instructions
Attention
Measuring of the measured values relating to voltage or power:
Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 using a 3-core, short-circuit proof cable
with the terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals on the current/
voltage measuring module.
Attention
Pay attention to the correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage
measuring modules and the correct routing direction when connecting or
routing the cables of the single phases of the main circuit! Follow the information in the operating instructions!
Removable terminals
The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
PZ2/Ø 5 mm 6 mm
Strip lengths
TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB
0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm
Cable cross section
10
Solid
2x 0,5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /
1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
10
Stranded
with/without
end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /
1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-12: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Lower:
Upper
L1, L2, L3:
Terminals for connecting the 3-core
cable of the main circuit
Fig. 13-13: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules
Caution
The phases L1 and L3 are interchanged at the upper/lower terminals!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-21
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.3.4
Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer (Interposing
Transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The
secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the pushthrough openings and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external
current transformer is the primary current of the current measuring module
of SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
If the rated current is used in the maid circuit, the secondary current of the
current transformer must be within the setting range of the current measuring module!
Main circuit
Secondary circuit
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
3UF 71 current
measuring
module
K3
L
M
3~
3UF 70
basic unit
3UF18 current transformer
Figure 13-14: Current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
Primary current (external current transformer)
Transformation ratio =
Secondary current x Number of loops n
(ext. current transformer)
(current measuring module)
In the following examples, the displayed actual current does not need to be
converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, because
SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value in relation to the parameterized set current le.
SIMOCODE pro
13-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Technical data of the current transformer
• Secondary current:
1A
• Frequency:
50 Hz/60 Hz
• Transformer rating:
Recommended > 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary
current and the cable length
• Overcurrent factor:
5P10 or 10P10
• Accuracy class:
1
Example 1:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A;
This means:
– the secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load
and is therefore within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current
measuring module used
– the set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.
Secondary circuit
Main circuit
L1 L2 L3
K1
3UF 71 current
measuring module
K2
K3
Setting range:
0.3 A - 3 A
L
M
3~
Primary current at
nominal load: 820 A
3UF 70 basic
unit
3UF18 current transformer
Secondary current: 1 A
Set current Ie: 1 A
Figure 13-15: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-23
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example 2:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
set current 0.3 to 3 A;
This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated
load and is therefore not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the
current measuring module used
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping through of
the secondary cables through the push-through openings of the current
measuring module. For double looping,
2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A
– The set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.
Main circuit
L1 L2 L3
Secondary circuit
Double-looping through of the secondary cables
K1
3UF 71 current
measuring module
K2
K3
Setting range:
0.3 A - 3 A
L
M
3~
Primary current at
nominal load: 205 A
3UF 70 basic
unit
3UF18 current transformer
Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A
Set current Ie: 0.5 A
Figure 13-16: Example (2 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
SIMOCODE pro
13-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.4
System Interfaces
13.4.1
General
Please observe the following notes:
• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
• There are various different lengths of connecting cables that can be used to
join the system components.
• The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2
system interfaces:
– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables leading from BU1 to the current
measuring module.
– Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
• Current measuring modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front incoming connecting cable leading from the basic unit.
• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream expansion module or basic unit BU2.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
• The operator panel has 2 system interfaces:
– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream
expansion module or basic unit.
• System interfaces that are not used are closed with a cover.
Attention:
Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and door adapters (IP54
degree of protection): Press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket
when using for the first time!
0
0
Figure 13-17: Closing the system interface with the system interface cover on the door adapter and
the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-25
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Example
The following figure shows the configuration for SIMOCODE pro V:
Basic unit (BU)
Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)
Incoming, from
• Expansion module
• Basic unit BU2
Outgoing, to
• Current measuring module
Outgoing, to
• Expansion module
• Operator panel
Outgoing, to
• Expansion module
• Operator panel
Current measuring module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
UF-01130
Incoming, from
• Upstream expansion module
• Basic unit
Incoming, from
• Basic unit
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Expansion module
UF-01130
Operator panel (OP)
Cover
Figure 13-18: Example of system interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.4.2
System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current Measuring
Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic
units. Other system components can be
• joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measuring modules
• directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use.
Attention
Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!
Basic units
Expansion modules
System
interfaces
Memory module,
addressing plug
System interface cover
Connecting cable
2 system
interfaces
Current measuring modules
System
interface
Connecting cable
Current/voltage measuring modules
Removable terminals
System
interface
Connecting cable
Removable terminals
Figure 13-19: Connecting system components to the system interface
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-27
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
2
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-13: Connecting the system interface
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Color-coded
Catches
3
1
2
System interfaces on the
front side and the bottom
Cover
Catches
Connecting
cable
Figure 13-20: Procedure for connecting the system interfaces
Safety instructions
Attention
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
Attention
Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
SIMOCODE pro
13-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.4.3
System Interfaces on the Operator Panel
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
• system interface on the rear. This is normally accessible when an integrated
operator panel is used. The incoming cable leading from the basic unit or an
expansion module is always connected here.
• system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated
operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required
and then removed again afterwards.
These can include:
– Memory module
– Addressing plug
– PC cable to connect a PC/programming device
– Cover (if a system interface is not being used).
Rear system interface
Front system interface
Connecting cable
e.g. memory module
Figure 13-21: System interfaces on the operator panel
Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
2
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-14: Connecting system components to the system interface
Attention
In order to ensure Degree of Protection IP54, press the cover firmly against
its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).
Attention
For the duration of the connecting procedure you can place the cover in one
of the two "park positions" (see Fig. 13-22).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-29
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
Rear side
Front
Cover
Park pos.
Catches
1
1
2
Catches
0
Color coded
Connecting cable
Figure 13-22: Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
Attention
Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
SIMOCODE pro
13-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.5
PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket
The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.
Attention
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to A/B terminals!
Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Step
1
Description
Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 13-15: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
9-pole
SUB-D plug
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole SUB-D socket
PROFIBUS DP cable
Figure 13-23: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13-31
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.6
Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP
Specifications
The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
PROFIBUS user organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the
PROFIBUS DMP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization. They contain important information about the cable arrangement
and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.:
++721 / 9658 590
Fax:
++721 / 9658 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, Order No. 2.111
Also see the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/1971286.
Application of bus termination modules
The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides proper bus termination even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no
(SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to
220/230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version
can also be used for 24 V DC.
Figure 13-24: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
13-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
14
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• commissioners
• mechanics
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from Chapter 1
• SIMOCODE ES software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-1
Commissioning and Servicing
14.1
General Information about Commissioning and
Servicing
Safety instructions
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and
burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing:
• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
• The motor is switched off.
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
• With the memory module on which the parameters from a basic unit have
already been saved: the memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the
supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit is automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded from
the memory module into the basic unit by pressing the Test/reset button.
• With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Possible cases for commissioning
There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic
factory default settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "bus" LED flashes green if a
DP master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized:
– The parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance.
– The parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if
the parameters, e.g. the set current, are correct for the new application.
Change these correspondingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
14-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
14.2
Commissioning
14.2.1
Sequence of steps
Note the information in the previous chapter "General Information about
Commissioning and Servicing" on page 14-2.
Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:
Step
Description
1
Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
• "Device" (green) lights up
• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Continue with Step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find
further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED Display" on page 14-5. Try
to rectify the error.
2
If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" on page 14-4.
3
Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with
a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable (see the figure below).
Attention
For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro ), only use the system interface on the front!
4
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit
PC cable,
Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Figure 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-3
Commissioning and Servicing
14.2.2
Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"12" in the "ON position".
2
Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow.
3
Briefly press the test/reset button. The set address is accepted.
The "Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4
Pull out the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2
Start SIMOCODE ES.
3
Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.
4
Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5
Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters.
6
Select the DP address.
7
Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set.
Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
14-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
14.2.3
Diagnostics via LED Display
The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain
device states:
LED
Status
Device
Device
status
Bus
Gen.
Fault
Bus
status
Error
status
Display
Description
Corrective measures for
errors
Green
Device ready for use
—
Green
flickering
Internal error
Yellow
Memory module or
addressing plug
recognized, test/reset
buttons control the
memory module or
addressing plug
—
Yellow
flashing
Memory module/
addressing plug read in;
basic factory default
settings configured
(duration: 3 s)
—
Yellow
flickering
Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s)
—
Red
Parameterization defective (also Gen. Fault on)
Parameterize anew and
switch the control
voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective
(also Gen. Fault on)
Exchange
basic unit!
Red
flashing
Memory module,
addressing plug
Expansion module
defective (also Gen.
Fault on - flashing)
Reprogram/replace the
memory module,
replace the expansion
module
Off
Supply voltage too low
Check if the supply
voltage is connected/
turned on
Off
Bus not connected or
bus error
Connect the bus or
check the bus parameters
Green
flashing
Baud rate recognized/
communication with
PC/programming device
—
Green
Communication with
PLC/DCS
—
Red
Error present; reset is
saved
Rectify error, e.g. overload
Red
flashing
Error present; no reset
saved
Rectify error, e.g. overload
Off
No error
Send back the basic unit
—
Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-5
Commissioning and Servicing
14.3
Servicing
14.3.1
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in
order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive
maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.
Reading out the statistical data
SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data which you e.g. can read out with
SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/Statistical data. By
specifying "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts", for example, you
can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Figure 14-2: Reading out statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
14-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
14.3.2
Saving the Parameters
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a
SIMOCODE ES file. This especially applies if you replace a basic unit or if
you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "Test/reset" button
for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory module. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
2
If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2
Start SIMOCODE ES.
3
Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
4
Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the
main memory are saved into a SIMOCODE ES file.
Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "test/reset" button
for a short period of time. The parameters are saved into the basic unit. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
2
If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Attention
When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred
from the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-7
Commissioning and Servicing
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2
Start SIMOCODE ES.
3
Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory.
4
Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.
Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
14-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
14.3.3
Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components
Replacing a basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving
the Parameters" on page 14-7.
2
Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
3
If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the
system interface.
4
Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
5
Demount the basic unit.
6
Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.
7
Mount the new basic unit.
8
Plug in the wired removable terminals.
9
Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11
Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in
chapter "Saving the Parameters" on page 14-7.
12
Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit
Replacing an expansion unit
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
2
If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the
system interface.
3
Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
4
Demount the expansion module.
5
Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion unit.
6
Mount the new expansion module.
7
Plug in the wired removable terminals.
8
Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
9
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10
Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 14-10: Replacing expansion units
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-9
Commissioning and Servicing
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Safety instructions
Warning
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit
must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual!
Attention
You do not have to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to
replace the components!
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
2
Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3
Pull out the removable terminals from the module as illustrated below (only
current/voltage measuring modules).
4
Disconnect the 3 cables of the 3 phases of the main circuit.
5
Replace the module (see chapter 13.2.2 "Current Measuring Modules" and
chapter 13.2.3 "Current/voltage Measuring Modules").
6
Connect the 3 cables of the main circuit and lead them through the pushthrough openings.
7
Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring
modules only).
8
Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
9
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10
Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 14-11: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage
measuring module
SIMOCODE pro
14-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Commissioning and Servicing
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Figure 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14-11
Commissioning and Servicing
14.3.4
Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings
With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Resetting the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic
device
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2
Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4
Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
5
Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6
Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
7
Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
9
Basic factory default settings are reset.
Table 14-12: Resetting basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device
Attention
If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to normal operation.
Attention
This function is always active, independent of the "Test/reset buttons locked"
parameter.
Resetting the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the
system interface with the PC/programming device and SIMOCODE ES is
started.
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Description
1
Click on the menu Switchgear > Open online.
2
In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory settings.
3
Press "Yes" to confirm.
4
Basic factory default settings are reset.
Table 14-13: Resetting the basic factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
14-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on troubleshooting.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• commissioners
• maintenance and service personnel.
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
• knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
15-1
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Error processing
Check the measuring
transducer and the
measuring circuit.
Acknowledgement
Reset
Contactor
control
Analog module
open circuit
A wire break has occurred in the
analog value measuring circuit.
Switched off
Another start
permitted
The start after the next one
should not be carried out until the
interlocking time has expired.
Blocked positioner
The torque switch has been acti- • The positioner is possi- Counter comvated without or before the corre- bly blocked.
mand
sponding limit switch.
• Acknowledge the fault "Open/Close".
with "free-wheeling"
with the counter command "Open/Close".
• Check the slide application and the limit
switches.
Switched off
Blocking
The maximum motor current has Please check the applica- Reset
tion which is driven by
exceeded the threshold for the
the motor.
blocking protection.
Possible cause: The motor is blokked.
Switched off
Changing of the Changing of a least one parameparameters is not ter is not possible in the current
operating state.
permissible in
the current mode
A lot of parameters can
only be changed when
the motor feeder is switched off and is not in the
"Remote" operating
mode.
For an overview of the
parameters that can
always be changed:
See chapter "Data Formats and Data Records"
on page B-1.
Configuration
fault
The configured device configuration does not match the current
configuration.
• Please check if all con- Rectify the
figured components
fault; Reset
are present.
• Check the actual configuration using "Configuration".
Switched off
Double 0
Both torque switches have been
activated simultaneously. The
motor feeder was turned off.
• Open circuit torque
switch.
• Torque switch is defective.
Switched off
Double 1
Both limit switches have been
activated simultaneously.
Limit switch is defective.
Switched off
Execution ON
command
The motor feeder could not be
• Main circuit is interrup- Reset
ted (fuse, circuit breaturned on after an ON command.
ker).
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective.
• Parameter execution
time is too short.
Switched off
SIMOCODE pro
15-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Execution stop
command
The motor feeder could not be
• The contactor contact Reset; Counter
turned off after a Stop command.
is welded.
command
• Parameter execution
time is too short.
• The "Open" end position has not been reached during the
parameterized runtime
(only in the case of the
"Positioner" and "Valve"
control functions).
Switched off
External earth
fault
The external earth-fault monitoring has been activated. A fault
current of too high a value is flowing.
Please check the motor
connection cable for
damage.
Reset
Switched off
External fault
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
A signal is pending at the input
(socket) of the standard function
"External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6".
Check the motor feeder.
Depends on the Switched off
parameterization
Fault - Antivalence
The limit switches are not registe- • Open circuit of the
ring any antivalent signals.
limit switch.
• Please check the slide
application and the
limit switches.
Counter comSwitched off
mand
"OPEN/CLOSE".
Fault - Bus
The PROFIBUS DP communicaCheck the
tion has been or is being interrup- PROFIBUS connection
ted
(plugs, cables, etc.)
Reset, Autoreset
Switched off
Fault - End position
Positioner/solenoid valve has left
the final position without a command being issued. The motor
feeder was turned off.
Acknowledge the fault
with "free-wheeling" by
the counter command
"OPEN/CLOSE".
Reset; Counter
command
Switched off
Fault - PLC/DCS
The PLC which controls the feeder was or is in the STOP state.
Please check the operating status of the PLC.
Reset, Autoreset
Switched off
Fault - Temporary
components
(e.g. memory
module)
One of the following components is defective:
• Addressing plug
• Memory module
• PC cable.
Please replace the defec- Rectify the
tive components.
fault; Reset
For this, see
chapter 13 "Mounting,
Wiring, Interfaces".
Feedback (F) OFF The current flow in the motor fee- • Main circuit is interrup- Reset
der was interrupted without the
ted (fuse, circuit breaker, main switch).
motor feeder being turned off.
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Switched off
Switched off
15-3
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Feedback (F) ON The motor feeder could not be
• Main circuit is interrup- Reset; Counter
ted (fuse, circuit brea- command
turned on after an ON command.
ker)
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective, "Execution
time" parameter is too
short
• Only in the case of the
"Positioner/Solenoid
valve" control function:
The end position
"CLOSE" has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime.
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Switched off
Hardware faults
The hardware of the
SIMOCODE pro basic device is
defective.
Please replace the basic Rectify the fault Switched off
unit.
See chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".
Internal earth
fault
The internal earth-fault monitoring Please check the motor
has been activated. A fault curconnection cable for
rent of too high a value is flowing. damage.
Reset
Switched off
Module fault
At least one SIMOCODE pro
module is not ready for use.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Motor operating
hours >
The configured limit value for the Please implement the
motor operating hours has been maintenance measures
exceeded.
planned for the feeder.
No start permissible
The permitted number of starts in
the monitoring timeframe was
achieved. The next start should
not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.
Reset
Switched off
Operational pro- The "Operational Protection Off
tection off (OPO) (OPO)" signal is pending.
A switched-on motor feeder was
switched off.
Switching on is not possible as
long as the OPO signal is pending.
Reset
Switched off;
for positioners:
QE1 or QE2
switched on
until end position - independent of the
configuration
• Connecting cable is
defective or has not
been plugged in correctly.
• Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
chapter 13 "Mounting,
Wiring, Interfaces".
SIMOCODE pro
15-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Overload
The motor feeder was overloaded.
Please check the motor Reset, Autoand the application which reset
is driven by the motor.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired or after an
emergency start is carried out.
Switched off
Overload and
Unbalance
The motor feeder was overloaded
asymmetrically.
Possible causes:
• Failure of a phase
• Fault in the motor windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired or after an
emergency start is carried out.
Switched off
Reset or
Auto reset
Parameter blok- The start-up parameter block preking during start- vents SIMOCODE pro parameters which could be saved in the
up active
DP Master from being accepted.
The block must be set when
• SIMOCODE ES
or
• SIMATIC PDM
is used for parameterizing.
The block may not be set when
• SIMOCODE pro C/V is integrated in STEP 7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM)
or
• SIMOCODE pro C was parameterized via GSD.
Attention
The parameter block is not active
in the case of devices which are
still set to the factory default settings or which have been reset to
the factory default settings!
Parameter is
faulty ("Gen.
fault" category)
There in an error in the parameter The designation of the
Rectify the
data.
faulty parameter can be fault; Reset
found on the basis of the
number (byte No.) in the
system manual chapter A
"Tables".
Parameter is
faulty ("Gen.
fault" category)
There is a fault in the parameter
data transmitted to the device.
Faults can occur in the parameter
data, for example, if the device
parameterization was not carried
out with SIMOCODE ES or
SIMATIC PDM.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Switched off
Check the parameter
data (data records 130
133) transmitted to the
device to make sure that
the contents are correct.
15-5
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Permissible num- The permitted number of starts in
ber of starts
the monitoring timeframe has
exceeded
already been exceeded. The next
start should not be carried out
until the interlocking time has
expired.
Phase unbalance The limit value for the phase
unbalance was exceeded. The
phase unbalance can lead to an
overload.
Possible causes:
• Failure of a phase
• Fault in the motor
windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
Power failure
The network failure lasted longer
monitoring (UVO) than the configured network
failure time.
Pre-warning
overload
(I > 115%)
The motor feeder is in overload
Please check the motor
operation.
and the application which
It will be tripped within a short
is driven by the motor.
period of time due to overloading
if this condition continues to persist.
Required
function is not
supported
At least one parameterized
Only activate functions
function is not supported by the that are supported by the
product version of the basic unit. product version of the
basic unit.
For example,
SIMOCODE pro V basic
units with the product
version E01 do not support the voltage measuring module, the
temperature module and
the analog module.
Status - Cooling The motor feeder was switched
down time active off due to overload.
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Reset
Switched off
Reset
Switched off
Reset
Switched off
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired.
Status - Emergency start executed
The thermal memory was deleted The motor can immediately be switched on again
with the function "Emergency
after an overload release.
start".
Status - Test
position Feedback (TPF)
The motor feeder is in the test
position.
The main current circuit is interrupted and the "cold starting" of
the feeder can be carried out.
Stop time >
The configured limit value for the Please implement the
stop time has been exceeded.
maintenance measures
planned for the feeder. If
possible, switch on the
feeder.
SIMOCODE pro
15-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Temperature
module Warning level
overshot
The temperature warning level
was exceeded.
Temperature
module Out of
Range
The temperature sensor is yielCheck the temperature
ding values which are not permit- sensor.
ted.
Reset
Switched off
Temperature
module sensor
fault
Either a short circuit or a wire
Check the temperature
break has occurred in the tempe- sensor nd the sensor
cable.
rature sensor circuit.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Current flows in the motor feeder The main circuit is not
Reset
even though the motor feeder is interrupted in test operain the test position (TPF).
tion.
Switched off
Test shutdown
The motor feeder was checked
and switched off by a test switchoff.
Reset
Switched off
Check the thermistor
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Thermistor short A short circuit has occurred in the Check the thermistor
circuit
thermistor sensor cable.
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Thermistor open A wire break has occurred in the
circuit
thermistor sensor cable.
Check the temperature
measuring station.
Thermistor trip
level
The thermistor protection has
been activated. The temperature
of the motor is too high.
Please check the motor Reset, Autoand the application which reset
is driven by the motor.
The motor cannot be
switched on again until
the temperature has reached the switch-back
point of the thermistor.
Warning level
cos phi <
The power factor has undershot Please check the application which is driven by
the warning level.
Possible cause: The motor is ope- the motor.
rated without a load.
Warning level I<
undershot
The maximum current has
undershot the warning level.
Warning level I>
overshot
The maximum current has overs- Please check the applicahot the warning level.
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Please check the application which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level P< The real power of the motor has
undershot
undershot the warning level.
Please check the application which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level P> The real power of the motor has
overshot
overshot the warning level.
Please check the application which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level U< The voltage in the motor feeder
undershot
has undershot the warning level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.
Check the motor feeder.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Switched off
15-7
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Warning level
0/4 - 20 mA<
undershot
The measured value on the analog input has undershot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
Warning level
0/4 - 20 mA>
overshot
The measured value on the analog input has overshot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
Wrong password The SIMOCODE pro parameters
are protected by a password.
An attempt was made to change
the parameters without entering
the password.
Acknowledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Please use the correct
password for changing
the parameters.
If you do not know the
password, new parameters cannot be set until
the factory default settings have been reset.
Please refer to chapter
14.3.4 "Resetting the
Basic Factory Default
Settings" for a description of the factory default
settings.
Table 15-1: Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
15-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
A
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-1
A-2
-
Reversing starter 1),2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Star-delta
starter 2)
-
-
Soft starter 2)
Soft starter with reversing
contactor 2)
Left
-
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Left
-
-
Left
-
-
ON<
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
-
-
Positioner 3 2)
Positioner 5 2)
-
Positioner 2 2)
-
-
Positioner 4 2)
-
Positioner 1 2)
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
Valve 2)
Pole-changing switch
with reversing the direction
of rotation 2)
Pole-changing switch 2)
Dahlander
with reversal of the direction
of rotation 2)
Dahlander 2)
-
-
Direct starter 1),2)
Star-delta starter
with reversal of the direction
of rotation 2)
-
ON<<
OFF
OFF
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Closed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
Right
ON
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
-
ON>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON>>
-
Left
-
-
QE2
OFF
impulse
-
-
Active
QE3
-
-
-
-
-
QE4
Reset
-
Reset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Fast
star
contactor
Fast
star
contactor
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
-
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
Left
network- networkcontactor contactor
ON
network
contactor
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON
command
ON
command
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Delta
Right
Left
Star
contactor contactor network network
contactor contactor
Star
Delta Network
contactor contactor contactor
ON
impulse
Right
ON
-
QE1
Contactor control
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
QE5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Left
fast
-
Left
fast
-
-
-
-
-
ON<<
QLE<<
(ON<<)
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Left
-
QLA
(OFF)
QLE>
(ON>)
Lamp control
OFF
OFF
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Closed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
Right
ON
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
-
ON>
Status signal
Closed
-
Left
slow
-
Left
slow
-
Left
-
-
Left
-
ON<
QLE<
(ON<)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON>>
QLE>>
(ON>>)
A.1
Overload 1),2)
Specification/
Control function
Control station
Tables
Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls
and Status Messages for the Control Functions
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status messages for control functions
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Tables
A.2
Abbreviations and Specifications
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation
Meaning
BU1
Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2
Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM
Current measuring module
UM
Current/voltage measuring module
DM1
Digital module 1
DM2
Digital module 2
OP
Operator panel
AM
Analog module
EM
Earth-fault module
TM
Temperature module
Th
Thermistor
CF
Control function
Cycl.
Cyclic
Acycl.
Acyclic
FAU
Fault
M
Event
W
Warning
Table A-2: Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-3
Tables
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Designation
Type
Reserved
Byte[4]
Cos phi
Byte
Reserved
Byte[5]
Max. current Imax
Word
Range
Unit
Information
0 .. 100
1%
BU2
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
BU1/BU2
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Entry relevant for basic
unit 1 and basic unit 2
Parameters can be changed while running.
Figure A-1: Table specifications
Signal - prm error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here.
Byte.Bit
Designation
(Prm group)
Reserved
4.0
Device configuration (12)
Parameter group 12
...
0.0
...
Figure A-2: Example for parameter group
SIMOCODE pro
A-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
A.3
Socket Assignment Table - Digital
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write these back.
No.
0
Designation
Information
Not connected
BU1/BU2
1
Fixed level value‚ 0
BU1/BU2
2
Fixed level value‚ 1
BU1/BU2
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Static level
Designation
BU - Test/reset button
BU1/BU2
9
BU - input 1
BU1/BU2
10
BU - input 2
BU1/BU2
11
BU - input 3
BU1/BU2
12
BU - input 4
BU1/BU2
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
Basic unit (BU)
DM1 - input 1
DM1
17
DM1 - input 2
DM1
18
DM1 - input 3
DM1
19
DM1 - input 4
DM1
20
DM2 - input 1
DM2
21
DM2 - input 2
DM2
22
DM2 - input 3
DM2
23
DM2 - input 4
DM2
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
26
Reserved
27
Reserved
28
Reserved
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
Reserved
32
Digital module (DM)
OP - Test/reset button
OP
33
Operator panel (OP)
OP - button 1
OP
34
OP - button 2
OP
35
OP - button 3
OP
36
OP - button 4
OP
37
Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-5
Tables
No.
Designation
38
41
Information
Reserved
39
40
Designation
Reserved
DPV1/RS-232 interface
(acyclic data)
Acyclic receive - bit 0.0
BU1/BU2
Acyclic receive - bit 0.1
BU1/BU2
42
Acyclic receive - bit 0.2
BU1/BU2
43
Acyclic receive - bit 0.3
BU1/BU2
44
Acyclic receive - bit 0.4
BU1/BU2
45
Acyclic receive - bit 0.5
BU1/BU2
46
Acyclic receive - bit 0.6
BU1/BU2
47
Acyclic receive - bit 0.7
BU1/BU2
48
Acyclic receive - bit 1.0
BU1/BU2
49
Acyclic receive - bit 1.1
BU1/BU2
50
Acyclic receive - bit 1.2
BU1/BU2
51
Acyclic receive - bit 1.3
BU1/BU2
52
Acyclic receive - bit 1.4
BU1/BU2
53
Acyclic receive - bit 1.5
BU1/BU2
54
Acyclic receive - bit 1.6
BU1/BU2
Acyclic receive - bit 1.7
BU1/BU2
Cyclic receive - bit 0.0
BU1/BU2
55
56
57
PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0]
(cyclic data)
Cyclic receive - bit 0.1
BU1/BU2
58
Cyclic receive - bit 0.2
BU1/BU2
59
Cyclic receive - bit 0.3
BU1/BU2
60
Cyclic receive - bit 0.4
BU1/BU2
61
Cyclic receive - bit 0.5
BU1/BU2
62
Cyclic receive - bit 0.6
BU1/BU2
63
Cyclic receive - bit 0.7
BU1/BU2
64
Cyclic receive - bit 1.0
BU1/BU2
65
Cyclic receive - bit 1.1
BU1/BU2
66
Cyclic receive - bit 1.2
BU1/BU2
67
Cyclic receive - bit 1.3
BU1/BU2
68
Cyclic receive - bit 1.4
BU1/BU2
69
Cyclic receive - bit 1.5
BU1/BU2
70
Cyclic receive - bit 1.6
BU1/BU2
Cyclic receive - bit 1.7
BU1/BU2
71
72
Enabled control command
Enabled control command ON <<
73
Enabled control command ON <
74
Enabled control command OFF
75
Enabled control command ON >
76
Enabled control command ON >>
77
Reserved
78
Reserved
79
Reserved
Dependent on the control
function
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
No.
80
Designation
Contactor controls
Designation
Contactor control 1 QE1
81
Contactor control 2 QE2
82
Contactor control 3 QE3
83
Contactor control 4 QE4
84
Contactor control 5 QE5
85
Reserved
86
Reserved
87
88
Dependent on the control
function
Reserved
Lamp controls
Display - QLE<< (ON<<)
89
Display - QLE< (ON<)
90
Display - QLA (OFF)
91
Display - QLE> (ON>)
92
Display - QLE>> (ON>>)
93
Display - QLS (fault)
94
Reserved
95
96
Information
Dependent on the control
function
BU1/BU2
Reserved
Status messages - General
Status - General fault
BU1/BU2
97
Status - General warning
BU1/BU2
98
Status - Device
BU1/BU2
99
Status - Bus
BU1/BU2
100
Status - PLC/DCS
BU1/BU2
101
Status - Motor current flowing
IM
102
Reserved
103
104
Reserved
Status messages - Controlling
Status - ON <<
105
Status - ON <
106
Status - OFF
107
Status - ON >
108
Status - ON >>
109
Status - Start active
BU1/BU2
110
Status - Interlocking time active
All reversing starters and
positioners
111
Status - Switching interval active
Star-delta,
Dahlander,
Pole-changing switch
112
Status - Runs in open direction
113
Status - Runs in closed direction
114
Status - FC
115
Status - FO
116
Status - TC
117
Status - TO
118
Status - Cold starting (TPF)
BU1/BU2
119
Status - OPO
BU2
120
Status - Remote mode of operation
BU1/BU2
Dependent on the control
function
Dependent on the control
function
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-7
Tables
No.
121
Designation
Information
Status - Emergency start executed
IM
122
Status - Cooling down time active
IM
123
Status - Pause time active
IM
124
Status messages - Protection
Designation
Status - Device test active
BU1/BU2
125
Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3
UM
126
Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1
UM
127
Reserved
128
Status messages - Miscellaneous
Event - Overload operation
IM
129
Event - Unbalance
IM
130
Event - Overload
IM
131
Event - Overload + phase failure
IM
132
Event - Internal earth fault
IM
133
Event - External earth fault
EM
134
Event - Warning ext. earth fault
EM
135
Event - Thermistor overload
Th
136
Event - Thermistor short circuit
Th
137
Event - Thermistor open circuit
Th
138
Event - TM warning T>
TM
139
Event - TM tripping T>
TM
140
Event - TM sensor error
TM
141
Event - TM Out of range
TM
142
Reserved
143
Reserved
144
Events - Protection
Event - Warning I>
IM
145
Events - Level monitoring
Event - Warning I<
IM
146
Event - Warning P>
UM
147
Event - Warning P<
UM
148
Event - Warning cos phi<
UM
149
Event - Warning U<
UM
150
Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
151
Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
152
Event - Tripping I>
IM
153
Event - Tripping I<
IM
154
Event - Tripping P>
UM
155
Event - Tripping P<
UM
156
Event - Tripping cos phi<
UM
157
Event - Tripping U<
UM
158
Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
159
Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
160
Event - Blocking
IM
161
Reserved
162
Reserved
163
Event - No start permitted
BU1/BU2
164
Event - Number of starts >
BU1/BU2
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
No.
Designation
Designation
Information
165
Event - Another start permitted
BU1/BU2
166
Event - Motor operating hours >
BU1/BU2
167
Event - Motor stop time >
BU1/BU2
168
Event - Limit value 1
BU2
169
Event - Limit value 2
BU2
170
Event - Limit value 3
BU2
171
Event - Limit value 4
BU2
172
Event - External fault 1
BU1/BU2
173
Event - External fault 2
BU1/BU2
174
Event - External fault 3
BU1/BU2
175
Event - External fault 4
BU1/BU2
176
Event - External fault 5
BU2
177
Event - External fault 6
BU2
178
Reserved
179
Reserved
180
Event - Analog module open circuit
181
Reserved
182
Reserved
183
Reserved
184
Events - Miscellaneous
Events - Timestamp function
Event - Timestamp function active+ok
185
Reserved
186
Reserved
187
Reserved
188
Events - System interface
Event - Configured operator panel is missing
189
Reserved
190
Reserved
191
Reserved
192
Faults - General
AM
BU2
BU1/BU2
Fault - HW fault basic unit
BU1/BU2
193
Fault - Module fault (module e.g. IM, DM)
BU1/BU2
194
Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory
module)
BU1/BU2
195
Fault - Configuration fault
BU1/BU2
196
Fault - Parameterization
BU1/BU2
197
Fault - Bus
BU1/BU2
198
Fault - PLC/DCS
BU1/BU2
199
200
Reserved
Faults - Controlling
Fault - Execution time ON
201
Fault - Execution time OFF
202
Fault - F ON
203
Fault - F OFF
204
Fault - Blocked positioner
Positioner
205
Fault - Double 0
Valve/positioner
206
Fault - Double 1
Valve/positioner
207
Fault - End position
Valve/positioner
Not for overload relays
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-9
Tables
No.
Designation
Designation
Information
208
Fault - Antivalence
Positioner
209
Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error
BU1/BU2
210
Fault - UVO error
BU2
211
Fault - OPO error
BU2
212
Reserved
213
Reserved
214
Reserved
215
216
Reserved
Freely programmable elements
Truth table 1 3I/1O output
BU1/BU2
217
Truth table 2 3I/1O output
BU1/BU2
218
Truth table 3 3I/1O output
BU1/BU2
219
Truth table 4 3I/1O output
BU2
220
Truth table 5 3I/1O output
BU2
221
Truth table 6 3I/1O output
BU2
222
Truth table 7 2I/1O output
BU2
223
Truth table 8 2I/1O output
BU2
224
Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1
BU2
225
Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2
BU2
226
Reserved
227
Reserved
228
Reserved
229
Reserved
230
Reserved
231
Reserved
232
Timer 1 output
BU1/BU2
233
Timer 2 output
BU1/BU2
234
Timer 3 output
BU2
235
Timer 4 output
BU2
236
Counter 1 output
BU1/BU2
237
Counter 2 output
BU1/BU2
238
Counter 3 output
BU2
239
Counter 4 output
BU2
240
Signal conditioning 1 output
BU1/BU2
241
Signal conditioning 2 output
BU1/BU2
242
Signal conditioning 3 output
BU2
243
Signal conditioning 4 output
BU2
244
Non-volatile element 1 output
BU1/BU2
245
Non-volatile element 2 output
BU1/BU2
246
Non-volatile element 3 output
BU2
247
Non-volatile element 4 output
BU2
248
Flashing 1 output
BU1/BU2
249
Flashing 2 output
BU1/BU2
250
Flashing 3 output
BU1/BU2
251
Flickering 1 output
BU1/BU2
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
No.
Designation
Designation
Information
252
Flickering 2 output
BU1/BU2
253
Flickering 3 output
BU1/BU2
254
Reserved
255
Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-11
Tables
A.4
Socket Assignment Table - Analog
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog).
You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In
order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
• the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
No.
Designation
Unit
Information
0
Not connected
1
Reserved
BU1/BU2
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Timer 1 - actual value
100 ms.
BU1/BU2
5
Timer 2 - actual value
100 ms.
BU1/BU2
6
Timer 3 - actual value
100 ms.
BU2
7
Timer 4 - actual value
100 ms.
BU2
8
Timer 1 - actual value
BU1/BU2
9
Timer 2 - actual value
BU1/BU2
10
Timer 3 - actual value
BU2
11
Timer 4 - actual value
BU2
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
max. current I_max
1%/Ie
IM
17
Current I_L1
1%/Ie
IM
18
Current I_L2
1%/Ie
IM
19
Current I_L3
1%/Ie
IM
20
Phase unbalance
1%
IM
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Voltage U_L1
1V
UM
25
Voltage U_L2
1V
UM
26
Voltage U_L3
1V
UM
27
Cos phi
1%
UM
28
Reserved
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
Reserved
32
Heating up of the motor model
2%
IM
33
Time to trip
100 ms.
IM
34
Recovery time
100 ms.
IM
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
SIMOCODE pro
A-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
No.
Designation
Unit
Information
35
Last tripping current
1%/Ie
IM
36
TM - temperature
1K
TM
37
TM - temperature 1
1K
TM
38
TM - temperature 2
1K
TM
39
TM - temperature 3
1K
TM
40
Permitted starts - actual value
41
Stop time
42
Reserved
43
Reserved
44
45
BU1/BU2
1h
BU1/BU2
AM - input 1
See 1)
AM
AM - input 2
See 1)
AM
46
AM - input 3
See 1)
AM
47
Reserved
48
Acyclic receive - Analog value
BU1/BU2
49
Cyclic receive - Analog value
BU2
50
Reserved
51
Reserved
52
Motor operating hours - H word
BU1/BU2
53
Motor operating hours - L word
BU1/BU2
54
Int. motor operating hours - H word
55
Int. motor operating hours - L word
56
Device operating hours - H word
BU1/BU2
57
Device operating hours - L word
BU1/BU2
58
Number of starts - H word
BU1/BU2
59
Number of starts - L word
BU1/BU2
60
Int. number of starts right - H word
BU1/BU2
61
Int. number of starts right - L word
BU1/BU2
62
Int. number of starts left - H word
BU1/BU2
63
Int. number of starts left - L word
BU1/BU2
64
Reserved
..
Reserved
69
Reserved
70
Real power P - H word
71
Real power P - L word
72
Apparent power S - H word
73
Apparent power S - L word
75
Reserved
..
Reserved
255
Reserved
1s
1W
1 VA
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)
1) S7 format:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
0/4 mA=0
20 mA=27648
A-13
Tables
A.5
Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics
The following table contains the detailed events of the slave diagnostics for
the status messages and the process alarm. This information is also contained in data record 92.
Byte.Bit
0.0
Status message
Faults - Controlling
Information
Fault - Execution ON command
BU1/BU2
0.1
Fault - Execution OFF command
BU1/BU2
0.2
Fault - F ON
BU1/BU2
0.3
Fault - F OFF
BU1/BU2
0.4
Fault - Block. Positioner
BU1/BU2
0.5
Fault - Double 0
BU1/BU2
0.6
Fault - Double 1
BU1/BU2
0.7
Fault - End position
BU1/BU2
1.0
Fault - Antivalence
BU1/BU2
1.1
Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error
BU1/BU2
1.2
Fault - UVO error
BU2
1.3
Fault - OPO error
BU2
1.4
Reserved
2.0
2.1
Reserved
Faults - Protection
Fault - Unbalance
IM/UM
2.2
Fault - Overload
IM/UM
2.3
Fault - Overload + phase failure
IM/UM
2.4
Fault - Int. earth fault
IM/UM
2.5
Fault - Ext. earth fault
EM
2.6
Reserved
2.7
Fault - Thermistor overload
Th
3.0
Fault - Thermistor short circuit
Th
3.1
Fault - Thermistor open circuit
Th
3.2
Reserved
3.3
Fault - TM tripping T>
TM
3.4
Fault - TM sensor error
TM
3.5
Fault - TM Out of range
TM
3.6
4.0
4.1
Reserved
Faults Level monitoring
Fault - Tripping I>
IM/UM
Fault - Tripping I<
IM/UM
4.2
Fault- Tripping P>
UM
4.3
Fault- Tripping P<
UM
4.4
Fault - Tripping cos phi<
UM
4.5
Fault - Tripping U<
UM
4.6
Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
4.7
Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
5.0
Fault - Blocking
IM/UM
5.1
Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events
SIMOCODE pro
A-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Tables
Byte.Bit
Status message
5.4
Fault - Number of starts >
5.5
6.0
6.1
Information
BU1/BU2
Reserved
Faults Miscellaneous
Fault - Ext. fault 1
BU1/BU2
Fault - Ext. fault 2
BU1/BU2
6.2
Fault - Ext. fault 3
BU1/BU2
6.3
Fault - Ext. fault 4
BU1/BU2
6.4
Fault - Ext. fault 5
BU2
6.5
Fault - Ext. fault 6
BU2
6.6
Reserved
6.7
Reserved
7.0
Fault - Analog module open circuit
AM
7.1
Fault - Test shutdown
BU1/BU2
7.2
Reserved
8.0
Warning - Overload operation
IM/UM
8.1
Warnings - Protection
Warning - Unbalance
IM/UM
8.2
Warning - Overload
IM/UM
8.3
Warning - Overload + phase failure
IM/UM
8.4
Warning - Internal earth fault
IM/UM
8.5
Warning - External earth fault
EM
8.6
Reserved
8.7
Warning - Thermistor overload
Th
9.0
Warning - Thermistor short circuit
Th
9.1
Warning - Thermistor open circuit
Th
9.2
Warning - TM warning T>
TM
9.3
Reserved
9.4
Warning - M sensor fault
TM
9.5
Warning - TM Out of range
TM
9.6
10.0
10.1
Reserved
Warnings Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I>
IM/UM
Warning - Warning I<
IM/UM
10.2
Warning - Warning P>
UM
10.3
Warning - Warning P<
UM
10.4
Warning - Warning cos phi <
UM
10.5
Warning - Warning U<
UM
10.6
Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
10.7
Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
11.0
Warning - Blocking
IM/UM
11.1
Reserved
11.3
Warning - No start permitted
BU1/BU2
11.4
- Number of motor starts>
BU1/BU2
11.5
Warning - Another start permitted
BU1/BU2
11.6
Warning - Motor operating hours >
BU1/BU2
11.7
Warning - Motor stop time >
BU1/BU2
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A-15
Tables
Byte.Bit
12.0
Status message
Warning - Ext. fault 1
BU1/BU2
12.1
Warning - Ext. fault 2
BU1/BU2
12.2
Warning - Ext. fault 3
BU1/BU2
12.3
Warning - Ext. fault 4
BU1/BU2
12.4
Warning - Ext. fault 5
BU2
12.5
Warning - Ext. fault 6
BU2
12.6
Reserved
12.7
Reserved
13.0
Warning - Analog module open circuit
13.1
Reserved
14.0
Reserved
14.1
Warnings - Miscellaneous
Information
Status messages - Protection
BU2
Status - Emergency start executed
IM
14.2
Status - Cooling down time active
IM
14.3
Status - Pause time active
IM
14.4
Reserved
14.5
14.6
Reserved
Status messages - Controlling
14.7
15.0
Status - Cold starting (TPF)
BU1/BU2
Reserved
Event - Parameter blocking during start-up active
BU1/BU2
Event - Parameter change not permitted in the current operating state
BU1/BU2
15.2
Event - Device does not support the required
functions
BU1/BU2
15.3
Event - Parameter faulty
BU1/BU2
15.4
Signal - Wrong password
BU1/BU2
15.5
Event - Password protection active
BU1/BU2
15.6
Event - Basic factory default setting
BU1/BU2
15.7
Event - Parameterization active
BU1/BU2
15.1
Events Parameterization
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B
Data Formats and Data Records
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about writing and reading data records
• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Data records - overview
Data record No.
Description
Read/write
1
S7 system diagnostics
Read
63
Recording analog values
Read
67
Process image of the outputs
Read
69
Process image of the inputs
Read
72
Fault memory
Read
92
Device diagnostics
(faults, warnings, events)
Read
94
Measured values
Read
95
Service/statistical data
Read/write
130
Basic unit parameter 1 (BU1 BU2)
Read/write
131
Basic unit parameter 2 (BU1 BU2)
Read/write
132
Extended device parameter 1 (BU2)
Read/write
133
Extended device parameter 2 (BU2)
Read/write
139
Marking
Read/write
160
Communication parameters
Read/write
165
Designation
Read/write
202
Acyclic receive
Read/write
203
Acyclic send
Read
224
Password protection
Write
Table B-1: Data records - Overview
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-1
Data Formats and Data Records
B.1
Handling Data Records
This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1
Writing/reading Data Records
Access to data records via slot and index
• Slot: access via slot 1
• Index: data record number.
Writing/reading data records with STEP7
You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master:
by calling SFC 58
• Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master:
by calling SFC 59.
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs
• in the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
reference manual
• in the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian"):
Byte arrangements
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 2
High byte
Byte 3
Low byte
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 0
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 1
Data type
High word
Double word (D-word)
Low word
Word
Byte
Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the "big endian" format
SIMOCODE pro
B-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.1.2
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation
Meaning
BU1
Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2
Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM
Current measuring module
UM
Current/voltage measuring module
DM 1
Digital module 1
DM 2
Digital module 2
OP
Operator panel
AM
Analog module
EM
Earth-fault module
TM
Temperature module
Th
Thermistor
CF
Control function
Cycl.
Cyclic
Acycl.
Acyclic
Table B-2: Abbreviations
B.1.3
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Specification
Type
Reserved
Byte[4]
cos phi
Byte
Reserved
Byte[5]
Max. current Imax
Word
Range
Unit
Information
0 .. 100
1%
BU2
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
BU1/BU2
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Entry relevant for basic
unit 1 and basic unit 2
Parameters can be changed while running.
Figure B-2: Specifications
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-3
Data Formats and Data Records
B.2
Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics
Byte DR0 DR1
Bit
Specification
Type
No error
Error
0.0
X
X
Module fault/OK
Bit
0
1
0.1
X
X
Internal fault
Bit
0
0
0.2
X
X
External fault
Bit
0
1
0.3
X
X
Channel fault
Bit
0
1
0.4
X
X
External auxiliary voltage missing Bit
0
0
0.5
X
X
Front panel plug missing
Bit
0
0
0.6
X
X
Module not parameterized
Bit
0
0
0.7
X
X
Module parameter false
Bit
0
0
1.0
X
X
Module type
Bit[4]
3
3
1.4
X
X
Channel information available
Bit
1
1
1.5
X
X
Application information available Bit
0
0
1.6
X
X
Substitute diagnostic alarm
Bit
0
0
1.7
X
X
Reserved = 0
Bit
0
0
2.0
X
X
Application module false/missing Bit
0
0
2.1
X
X
Communication fault
Bit
0
0
2.2
X
X
Operating status (0=RUN,
1=STOP)
Bit
0
0
2.3
X
X
Time monitoring activated
Bit
0
0
2.4
X
X
Internal module supply voltage
failed
Bit
0
0
2.5
X
X
Battery flat (BATTF)
Bit
0
0
2.6
X
X
Standby supply failed
Bit
0
0
2.7
X
X
Reserved = 0
Bit
0
0
3.0
X
X
Rack failure (detected by IM)
Bit
0
0
3.1
X
X
Processor failure
Bit
0
0
3.2
X
X
EPROM error
Bit
0
0
3.3
X
X
RAM error
Bit
0
0
3.4
X
X
ADU/DAU error
Bit
0
0
3.5
X
X
Blown fuse
Bit
0
0
3.6
X
X
PRAL missing
Bit
0
0
3.7
X
X
Reserved = 0
Bit
0
0
4.0
X
Channel type
Byte
0x7D
0x7D
5.0
X
Length of the channel-specific
diagnostics
Byte
0x20
0x20
6.0
X
Number of channels
Byte
0x01
0x01
7.0
X
Channel fault vector (one bit per
channel)
Byte
0x01
0x01
8.0
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
8.1
X
Short circuit
Bit
0
0
8.2
X
Undervoltage
Bit
0
0
8.3
X
Overvoltage
Bit
0
0
8.4
X
Overload
Bit
0
0
8.5
X
Overtemperature
Bit
0
0
Information
SIMOCODE pro
B-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte
Bit
DR0 DR1
Specification
Type
No error
Error
8.6
X
Wire break
Bit
0
0
8.7
X
Upper limit overshot
Bit
0
0
9.0
X
Lower limit undershot
Bit
0
0
9.1
X
Error
Bit
0
X
9.2
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
9.3
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
9.4
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
9.5
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
9.6
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
9.7
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
10.0
X
Parameterization error
Bit
0
X
10.1
X
Sensor or load voltage missing
Bit
0
0
10.2
X
Fuse defective
Bit
0
0
10.3
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
10.4
X
Ground fault
Bit
0
0
10.5
X
Reference channel fault
Bit
0
0
10.6
X
Process alarm missing
Bit
0
0
10.7
X
Actuator warning
Bit
0
0
11.0
X
Actuator switch-off
Bit
0
0
11.1
X
Safety-related switch-off
Bit
0
0
11.2
X
External fault
Bit
0
0
11.3
X
Non-specific fault
Bit
0
0
11.4
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
11.5
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
11.6
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
11.7
X
Reserved
Bit
0
0
12.0
X
Reserved
Byte[4]
0
0
Information
Error F9
Error F16
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-5
Data Formats and Data Records
B.3
Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
Range
Information
0.0
Reserved
Word
2.0
Reserved
Byte
3.0
Recording active
Bit
0, 1
BU2
3.1
Trigger event occured
Bit
0, 1
BU2
3.2
Reserved
Bit[6]
0
4.0
Measured value (0)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
6.0
Measured value (1)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
122.0
Measured value (59)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
124.0
Reserved
Byte[76]
0
...
Table B-4: Data record 63 - Recording of analog values
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.
You will find all the available analog values with their units in
Kapitel A.4 "Socket Assignment Table - Analog".
B.4
Byte.Bit
Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs
Specification
Presetting
(also see parameters)
Type
0.0
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<
Bit
0.1
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF
Bit
0.2
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>
Bit
0.3
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3
Test 1
Bit
0.4
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4
Motor protection - Emergency start
Bit
0.5
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5
Mode selector S1
Bit
0.6
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6
Reset 1
Bit
0.7
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7
Not assigned
Bit
1.0
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.0
Not assigned
Bit
1.1
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.1
Not assigned
Bit
1.2
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.2
Not assigned
Bit
1.3
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.3
Not assigned
Bit
1.4
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.4
Not assigned
Bit
1.5
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.5
Not assigned
Bit
1.6
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.6
Not assigned
Bit
1.7
Cyclic receive - Bit 1.7
Not assigned
Bit
2.0 to 3.7
Cyclic receive - Analog value
Not assigned
Word
Information
BU1/BU2
BU2
Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs
SIMOCODE pro
B-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.5
Byte.Bit
Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs
Specification
Presetting
(also see parameters)
Type
Information
0.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.0
Status - ON <
Bit
0.1
Cyclic send - Bit0.1
Status - OFF
Bit
0.2
Cyclic send - Bit 0.2
Status - ON >
Bit
0.3
Cyclic send - Bitt 0.3
Event - Overload operation
Bit
0.4
Cyclic send - Bit 0.4
Status - Interlocking time active
Bit
0.5
Cyclic send - Bit 0.5
Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit
0.6
Cyclic send - Bit 0.6
Status - General fault
Bit
0.7
Cyclic send - Bit 0.7
Status - General warning
Bit
1.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.0
Not assigned
Bit
1.1
Cyclic send - Bit 1.1
Not assigned
Bit
1.2
Cyclic send - Bit 1.2
Not assigned
Bit
1.3
Cyclic send - Bit 1.3
Not assigned
Bit
1.4
Cyclic send - Bit 1.4
Not assigned
Bit
1.5
Cyclic send - Bit 1.5
Not assigned
Bit
1.6
Cyclic send - Bit 1.6
Not assigned
Bit
1.7
Cyclic send - Bit 1.7
Not assigned
Bit
2.0
PLC/DCS analog. input 1
Max. current I_max
Word
4.0
PLC/DCS analog. input 2
Not assigned
Word
BU2
6.0
PLC/DCS analog. input 3
Not assigned
Word
BU2
8.0
PLC/DCS analog. input 4
Not assigned
Word
BU2
BU1/BU2
Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-7
Data Formats and Data Records
B.6
Data Record 72 - Fault Memory
Byte.Bit
Entry
0.0
Specification
Type
Information
Timestamp
D-word
BU1/BU2
Type
Byte
BU1/BU2
5.0
Error number
Byte
BU1/BU2
6.0
Timestamp
D-word
BU1/BU2
Type
Byte
BU1/BU2
Error number
Byte
BU1/BU2
Timestamp
D-word
BU1/BU2
Type
Byte
BU1/BU2
Error number
Byte
BU1/BU2
4.0
10.0
1
2
11.0
...
120.0
124.0
21
125.0
Table B-7: Data record 72 - Fault memory
Timestamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a timestamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains a fault: Refer to the error
numbers for detailed information: You will find the meaning in
Kapitel B.7 "Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics" in the "Error number"
column of the "Data record 92 - diagnostics".
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Mains ON". In this case,
the error number contains the number of mains ON, reduced by 1
(0 = 1x mains ON, ...).
SIMOCODE pro
B-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.7
Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics
Byte.Bit
Specification
0.0
1.0
Information
Status messages - Status - General fault
General
BU1/BU2
Status - General warning
BU1/BU2
1.2
Status - Device
BU1/BU2
1.3
Status - Bus
BU1/BU2
1.4
Status - PLC/DCS
BU1/BU2
1.5
Status - Motor current flowing
IM
1.6
Reserved
Status messages - Status - ON <<
Controlling
2.1
Status - ON <
2.2
Status - OFF
2.3
Status - ON >
2.4
Status - ON >>
2.5
Status - Start active
BU1/BU2
2.6
Status - Interlocking time active
All reversing starters
and positioners
2.7
Status - Switching interval active
Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing switches
3.0
Status - Runs in open direction
3.1
Status - Runs in closed direction
3.2
Status - FC
3.3
Status - FO
3.4
Status - TC
3.5
Status - TO
3.6
Status - Cold starting (TPF)
BU1/BU2
3.7
Status - OPO
BU2
4.0
Status - Remote mode of operation
BU1/BU2
4.1
Status messages - Status - Emergency start executed
Protection
IM
M
4.2
Status - Cooling down time active
IM
M
4.3
Status - Pause time active
IM
4.4
Status messages - Status - Device test active
Miscellaneous
Dependent on the
control function
Dependent on the
control function
Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3
UM
4.6
Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1
UM
4.7
M
BU1/BU2
4.5
5.0
Error No.
***)
Reserved
1.1
2.0
DP
Diagn.*)
Reserved
Events - Protection
Event - Overload operation
IM
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-9
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.Bit
Specification
Information
5.1
Event - Unbalance
IM
5.2
Event - Overload
IM
5.3
Event - Overload + phase failure
IM
5.4
Event - Internal earth fault
IM
5.5
Event - External earth fault
EM
5.6
Event - Warning ext. earth fault
EM
5.7
Event - Thermistor overload
Th
6.0
Event - Thermistor short circuit
Th
6.1
Event - Thermistor open circuit
Th
6.2
Event - TM warning T>
TM
6.3
Event - TM tripping T>
TM
6.4
Event - TM sensor error
TM
6.5
Event - TM Out of range
TM
6.6
Reserved
7.0
Events - Level
monitoring
Event - Warning I>
IM
7.1
Event - Warning I<
IM
7.2
Event - Warning P>
UM
7.3
Event - Warning P<
UM
7.4
Event - Warning cos phi<
UM
7.5
Event - Warning U<
UM
7.6
Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
7.7
Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
8.0
Event - Tripping I>
IM
8.1
Event - Tripping I<
IM
8.2
Event - Tripping P>
UM
8.3
Event - Tripping P<
UM
8.4
Event - Tripping cos phi<
UM
8.5
Event - Tripping U<
UM
8.6
Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
8.7
Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
9.0
Event - Blocking
IM
9.1
Reserved
9.3
Event - No start permitted
BU1/BU2
9.4
Event - Number of starts >
BU1/BU2
9.5
Event - Another start permitted
BU1/BU2
9.6
Event - Motor operating hours >
BU1/BU2
9.7
Event - Motor stop time >
BU1/BU2
10.0
Event - Limit value 1
BU2
10.1
Event - Limit value 2
BU2
10.2
Event - Limit value 3
BU2
10.3
Event - Limit value 4
BU2
DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.Bit
10.4
Specification
Event - Ext. fault 1
BU1/BU2
10.5
Event - Ext. fault 2
BU1/BU2
10.6
Event - Ext. fault 3
BU1/BU2
10.7
Event - Ext. fault 4
BU1/BU2
11.0
Event - Ext. fault 5
BU2
11.1
Event - Ext. fault 6
BU2
11.2
Reserved
11.3
Reserved
11.4
Event - Analog module open circuit
11.5
Reserved
12.0
Events Miscellaneous
Information
Events Timestamp
function
12.1
12.4
Error No.
***)
AM
BU2
Reserved
Events - System
interface
12.5
12.6
13.0
Event - Timestamp function
active+ok
DP
Diagn.*)
Event - Configured operator panel
missing
BU1/BU2
Event - Module not supported
BU1/BU2
Reserved
Events - Memory
module
Event - Memory module read in
BU1/BU2
13.1
Event - Memory module programmed
BU1/BU2
13.2
Event - Memory module deleted
BU1/BU2
13.3
Reserved
13.7
Events - Addressing plug
Event - Addressing plug read in
BU1/BU2
14.0
Events - Parameterization
Event - Parameter blocking during
start-up active
BU1/BU2
M
14.1
Event - Parameter change not permitted in the current operating
state
BU1/BU2
M
14.2
Event - Device does not support the BU1/BU2
required functions
M
14.3
Event - Parameter faulty
BU1/BU2
M
14.4
Event - Wrong password
BU1/BU2
M
14.5
Event - Password protection active
BU1/BU2
14.6
Event - Basic factory default setting BU1/BU2
14.7
Event - Parameterization active
15.0
Event - prm number error (bytes) **) BU1/BU2
16.0
Reserved
17.0
Warnings - Protec- Warning - Overload operation
tion
BU1/BU2
IM
W
17.1
Warning - Asymmety
IM
W
17.2
Warning - Overload
IM
W
17.3
Warning - Overload + phase failure
IM
W
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-11
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.Bit
Specification
Information
DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
17.4
Warning - Internal earth fault
IM
W
17.5
Warning - External earth fault
EM
W
17.6
Reserved
17.7
Warning - Thermistor overload
Th
W
18.0
Warning - Thermistor short circuit
Th
W
18.1
Warning - Thermistor open circuit
Th
W
18.2
Warning - TM warning T>
TM
W
18.3
Reserved
18.4
Warning - TM sensor error
TM
W
18.5
Warning - TM Out of range
TM
W
Warning - Warning I>
IM
W
19.1
Warning - Warning I<
IM
W
19.2
Warning - Warning P>
UM
W
19.3
Warning - Warning P<
UM
W
19.4
Warning - Warning cos phi <
UM
W
19.5
Warning - Warning U<
UM
W
19.6
Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
W
19.7
Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
W
20.0
Warning - Blocking
IM
W
20.1
Reserved
20.3
Warning - No start permitted
BU1/BU2
W
20.4
Warning - Number of motor starts>
BU1/BU2
W
20.5
Warning - Another start permitted
BU1/BU2
W
20.6
Warning - Motor operating hours >
BU1/BU2
W
20.7
Warning - Motor stop time >
BU1/BU2
W
Warning - Ext. fault 1
BU1/BU2
W
21.1
Warning - Ext. fault 2
BU1/BU2
W
21.2
Warning - Ext. fault 3
BU1/BU2
W
21.3
Warning - Ext. fault 4
BU1/BU2
W
21.4
Warning - Ext. fault 5
BU2
W
21.5
Warning - Ext. fault 6
BU2
W
21.6
Reserved
21.7
Reserved
22.0
Warning - Analog module open circuit
AM
W
Fault - HW fault basic unit
BU1/BU2
F9
0
Fault - Module fault
(e.g. module IM, DM)
BU1/BU2
F9
1
18.6
19.0
21.0
Reserved
Warnings Level monitoring
Warnings Miscellaneous
22.1
23.0
23.1
Reserved
Faults General
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.Bit
Specification
Information
DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
23.2
Fault - Temporary components (e.g.
memory module)
BU1/BU2
F9
2
23.3
Fault - Configuration fault
BU1/BU2
F16
3
23.4
Fault - Parameterization
BU1/BU2
F16
4
23.5
Fault - Bus
BU1/BU2
5
23.6
Fault - PLC/DCS
BU1/BU2
6
23.7
Reserved
24.0
Faults Controlling
Fault - Runtime ON
CF = positioner
FAU
8
24.1
Fault - Execution OFF command
CF = positioner
FAU
9
24.2
Fault - F ON
CF = positioner
FAU
10
24.3
Fault - F OFF
CF = positioner
FAU
11
24.4
Fault - Blocked positioner
CF = positioner
FAU
12
24.5
Fault - Double 0
CF = positioner
FAU
13
24.6
Fault - Double 1
CF = positioner
FAU
14
24.7
Fault - End position
CF = positioner
FAU
15
25.0
Fault - Antivalence
CF = positioner
FAU
16
25.1
Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error
BU1/BU2
FAU
17
25.2
Fault - UVO error
BU2
FAU
18
25.3
Fault - OPO error
BU2
FAU
19
25.4
Reserved
IM
FAU
25
26.0
26.1
Reserved
Faults - Protection Fault - Unbalance
26.2
Fault - Overload
IM
FAU
26
26.3
Fault - Overload + phase failure
IM
FAU
27
26.4
Fault - Int. earth fault
IM
FAU
28
26.5
Fault - Int. earth fault
EM
FAU
29
26.6
Reserved
26.7
Fault - Thermistor overload
Th
FAU
31
27.0
Fault - Thermistor short circuit
Th
FAU
32
27.1
Fault - Thermistor open circuit
Th
FAU
33
27.2
Reserved
27.3
Fault - TM tripping T>
TM
FAU
35
27.4
Fault - TM sensor error
TM
FAU
36
27.5
Fault - TM Out of range
TM
FAU
37
Fault - Tripping I>
IM
FAU
40
28.1
Fault - Tripping I<
IM
FAU
41
28.2
Fault- Tripping P>
UM
FAU
42
28.3
Fault- Tripping P<
UM
FAU
43
28.4
Fault - Tripping cos phi<
UM
FAU
44
28.5
Fault - Tripping U<
UM
FAU
45
28.6
Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA>
AM
FAU
46
27.6
28.0
Reserved
Faults - Level
monitoring
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-13
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.Bit
Specification
Information
DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
28.7
Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<
AM
FAU
47
29.0
Fault - Blocking
IM
FAU
48
29.1
Reserved
29.4
Fault - Number of starts >
BU1/BU2
FAU
52
Fault - External fault 1
BU1/BU2
FAU
56
30.1
Fault - External fault 2
BU1/BU2
FAU
57
30.2
Fault - External fault 3
BU1/BU2
FAU
58
30.3
Fault - External fault 4
BU1/BU2
FAU
59
30.4
Fault - External fault 5
BU2
FAU
60
30.5
Fault - External fault 6
BU2
FAU
61
30.6
Reserved
30.7
Reserved
31.0
Fault - Analog module open circuit
AM
FAU
64
31.1
Fault - Test shutdown
BU1/BU2
FAU
65
31.2
Reserved
29.5
30.0
Reserved
Faults Miscellaneous
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
*The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available in
the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:
• FAU Fault
• S: Signal
• W: Warning
• F9, F16:Error types
See also Kapitel A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".
**) Event - prm error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the parameter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.
Byte.Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Reserved
4.0
Device configuration
(see above) (12)
Parameter group 12
...
0.0
Figure B-3: Example of parameter group
***) See "Error numbers" in Kapitel B.6 "Data Record 72 - Fault Memory".
SIMOCODE pro
B-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.8
Data Record 94 - Measured Values
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
Range
Unit
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Heating up the motor model
Byte
0 .. 255
See 2)
IM
5.0
Phase unbalance
Byte
0 .. 100
1%
IM
6.0
Cos phi
Byte
0 .. 100
1%
UM
7.0
Reserved
Byte[5]
12.0
Max. current Imax
Word
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
IM
14.0
Current IL1
Word
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
IM
16.0
Current IL2
Word
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
IM
18.0
Current IL3
Word
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
IM
20.0
Last tripping current
Word
0 .. 65535
1% / Ie
IM
22.0
Time to trip
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
IM
24.0
Cooling down time
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
IM
26.0
Voltage UL1
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
28.0
Voltage UL2
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
30.0
Voltage UL3
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
32.0
AM - Output
Word
0 .. 27648
34.0
AM - Input 1
Word
0 .. 27648
36.0
AM - Input 2
Word
0 .. 27648
38.0
Reserved
40.0
Max. TM - Temperature
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see 3)
TM
42.0
TM - Temperature 1
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see 3)
TM
3)
TM
AM
AM
See 1)
AM
44.0
TM - Temperature 2
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see
46.0
TM - Temperature 3
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see 3)
TM
48.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
52.0
Real power P
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
1W
UM
56.0
Apparent power S
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
1 VA
UM
60.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
Table B-9: Data record 94 - Measured values
1) S7 format:
0/4mA = 0
20mA = 27648
2) Representation "Heating up the motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2% increments in bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%),
bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-15
Data Formats and Data Records
B.9
Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data
Writing the service/statistical data
Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w:
r:
Byte.Bit
0.0
4.0
5.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
26.0
28.0
30.0
32.0
40.0
44.0
48.0
52.0
56.0
60.0
64.0
value can be written/changed
value can only be read
Specification
Reserved
Permitted starts - Actual value
Reserved
Number of parameterizations
Number of overload trippings
Number of internal overload trippings
Stop time
Timer 1 - Actual value
Timer 2 - Actual value
Timer 3 - Actual value
Timer 4 - Actual value
Timer 1 - Actual value
Timer 2 - Actual value
Timer 3 - Actual value
Timer 4 - Actual value
Reserved
Motor operating hours
Int. motor operating hours
Device operating hours
Numer of starts
Internal number of starts right
Internal number of starts left
Reserved
Type
Range
Unit
Information
Byte[4]
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
0
0 .. 255
r
BU1/BU2
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
r
r/w
r
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
Byte[12]
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
1h
100 ms.
100 ms.
100 ms.
100 ms.
r/w
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU2
BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU2
BU2
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
1s
1s
1s
r/w
r
r
r/w
r
r
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Table B-10: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
B-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.10
Byte
Bit
Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Device configuration (12)
Byte[8]
4.0
Device class
Byte
5, 9
5 = BU1
9 = BU2
BU1/BU2
BU2
5.0
Thermistor (Th)
Bit
0, 1
1 = active; thermistor in the BU
BU1/BU2
5.1
Reserved
Bit[7]
6.0
Operator panel (OP)
Bit
0, 1
BU1/BU2
6.1
Analog module (AM)
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.2
Temperature module (TM)
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.3
Earth-fault module (EM)
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.4
Digital module 1 (DM1)
Bit[2]
0 .. 2
6.6
Digital module 2 (DM2)
Bit[2]
0 .. 2
7.0
Reserved
Bit[8]
8.0
Current measuring module
(IM)
Bit[7]
0 .. 5
8.7
Voltage measuring (UM)
Bit
0, 1
9.0
Reserved
10.0
Control function (CF)
BU1/BU2
0x00
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x20
0x21
0x30
0x31
0x40
0x41
0x50
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x70
0x71
11.0
Reserved
0 = no digital module
1 = monostable
2 = bistable
BU2
BU2
0 = no current measuring
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A -25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
BU1/BU2
BU2
0x00 = overload
0x10 = direct starter
0x11 = reversing starter
0x12 =linked switchgear
0x20 = star-delta starter
0x21 = star-delta starter with
reversal of the direction of rotation
0x30 =Dahlander
0x31 = Dahlander with reversal
of the direction of rotation
0x40 = pole-changing switch
0x41 = pole-changing switch
with reversal of the direction of
rotation
0x50 = valve
0x60 =positioner 1
0x61 =positioner 2
0x62 =positioner 3
0x63 =positioner 4
0x64 =positioner 5
0x70 =soft starter
0x71 =soft starter with reversing contactor
BU1/BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
Bit[8]
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-17
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
12.0
Bit parameters (16)
12.0
No configuration fault due to
OP
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
12.1
Parameter blocking during
start-up active
Bit
0, 1
1
BU1/BU2
12.2
Test/reset buttons blocked
Bit
0, 1
0
12.3
Bus and PLC/DCS - Reset
Bit
0, 1
0
12.4
Reserved
Bit
0
12.5
Reserved
Bit
0
12.6
Reserved
Bit
0
12.7
Reserved
Bit
0
13.0
Diagnostics for process
signals
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
13.1
Diagnostics for process
warnings
Bit
0, 1
1
BU1/BU2
13.2
Diagnostics for process faults
Bit
0, 1
1
BU1/BU2
13.3
Diagnostics for device faults
Bit
0, 1
1
BU1/BU2
13.4
Reserved
Bit
13.5
Reserved
Bit
13.6
Bus monitoring
Bit
0, 1
1
13.7
PLC/DCS monitoring
Bit
0, 1
1
14.0
Overload protection - Type of
load
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase
IM
14.1
Overload protection - Reset
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = manual, 1 = automatic
IM
14.2
Reserved
Bit
14.3
Save switching command
Bit
0, 1
0
14.4
Non-maintained command
mode
Bit
0, 1
0
14.5
Cold starting level (TPF)
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact
BU1/BU2
14.6
Type of load
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = motor, 1 = resistiveload
BU1/BU2
14.7
Reserved
Bit
15.0
External fault 1 - Type
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact
BU1/BU2
15.1
External fault 2 - Type
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
15.2
External fault 3 - Type
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
15.3
External fault 4 - Type
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
15.4
External fault 1 - Activity
Bit
0, 1
0
15.5
External fault 2 - Activity
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
15.6
External fault 3 - Activity
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
15.7
External fault 4 - Activity
Bit
0, 1
0
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
0 = manual, 1 = automatic
BU1/BU2
0
0
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
0
0
0 = always, 1 = only motor ON
BU1/BU2
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
16.0
Bit[2] parameters (20)
16.0
Thermistor Overload response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
3
Th
16.2
Thermistor - Response
to sensor error
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
2
Th
16.4
Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
16.6
Motor protection Overload response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
3
17.0
Motor protection - Overload
response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
2
17.2
Motor protection - Response
to unbala
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
2
17.4
Tripping response I>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
17.6
Warning response I>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
18.0
Tripping response I<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
18.2
Warning response I<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
18.4
Blocking protection Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
18.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
19.0
Monitoring the number of
starts Response to overshooting
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
BU1/BU2
19.2
Monitoring the number of
starts Response at pre-warning
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
BU1/BU2
19.4
Operating hours
monitoring - Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
BU1/BU2
19.6
Stop time monitoring Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
BU1/BU2
20.0
Ext. fault 1 - Response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
BU1/BU2
20.2
Ext. fault 2 - Response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
BU1/BU2
20.4
Ext. fault 3 - Response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
BU1/BU2
20.6
Ext. fault 4 - Response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
BU1/BU2
21.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
21.2
Basic unit - Debounce time
inputs
Bit[2]
0-3
1
Offset 6 ms
BU1/BU2
21.4
Timer 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
BU1/BU2
21.6
Timer 2 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
0 = with clsg. delay
1 = with clsg. delay with mem.
2 = with OFF delay
3 = with fleet. clsg.
22.0
Signal conditioning 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
Signal conditioning 2 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
22.4
Non-volatile
element 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
0 = non-inverting
1 = inverting
2 = rising edge with memory
3 = falling edge with memory
BU1/BU2
22.2
22.6
Non-volatile
element 2 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
BU1/BU2
23.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
BU1/BU2
0
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
0
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-19
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
23.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
BU1/BU2
23.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
BU1/BU2
23.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
BU1/BU2
24.0
Bit[4] parameters (24)
24.0
External fault 1 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
BU1/BU2
24.4
External fault 2 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B Bit[0] = panel reset
Bit[1] = automatic reset
0101B Bit[2] = remote reset
Bit[3] = OFF command reset
25.0
External fault 3 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B
BU1/BU2
25.4
External fault 4 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B
BU1/BU2
26.0
Limit monitor - Hysteresis for
limit monitoring
Bit[4]
0 .. 15
5
BU1/BU2
26.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
27.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
27.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
28.0
Byte parameters (28)
28.0
Internal earth fault - Delay
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
29.0
Overload protection - Class
Byte
5, 10 .. 35,
40
10
BU1
BU2
30.0
Motor protection - Delay
with overload operation
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
31.0
Motor protection - Unbalance
level
Byte
0 .. 100
40
IM
32.0
Unbalance protection - Delay
with unbalance
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
33.0
Interlocking time
Byte
0 .. 255
0
34.0
F time
Byte
0 .. 255
5
35.0
Trip level I>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
IM
36.0
Warning level I>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
IM
37.0
Trip level I<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
IM
38.0
Warning level I<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
IM
39.0
Blocking level
Byte
0 .. 255
0
IM
40.0
Trip delay I>
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
41.0
Warning delay I>
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
42.0
Trip delay I<
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
43.0
Warning delay I<
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
44.0
Blocking delay
Byte
0 .. 255
5
IM
45.0
Monitoring the number of
starts - Permitted starts
Byte
1 .. 255
1
BU1
BU2
46.0
Reserved
Byte
0
47.0
Reserved
Byte
0
48.0
Truth table 1 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 ..
11111111B
BU1/BU2
0 = deactivated
0
BU1/BU2
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
49.0
Truth table 2 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 ..
11111111B
0
BU1/BU2
50.0
Truth table 3 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 ..
11111111B
0
BU1/BU2
51.0
Reserved
Byte
52.0
Word parameters (32)
52.0
Motor protection - Cooling
down time
54.0
Motor protection - Pause time Word
0 .. 65535
0
0 = deactivated
56.0
Run time
Word
0 .. 65535
10
0 = deactivated
58.0
Monitoring the number of
starts Time range for starts
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
60.0
Monitoring the number of
starts - Interlocking time
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
62.0
Stop time level >
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
64.0
Timer 1 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
66.0
Timer 2 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
68.0
Counter 1 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
70.0
Counter 2 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU1
BU2
72.0
Reserved
Word
0
74.0
Reserved
Word
0
76.0
D-word parameters (36)
76.0
Operator enables
Bit[32]
0 .. 1..1B
0.0.0B
80.0
Overload protection Set current Ie1
D-word
0 .. 63000
30
IM
84.0
Motor operating hours level >
D-word
0 ..
0xFFFFFFFF
0
BU1
BU2
88.0
Reserved
D-word
Word
0
600 ..65535 3000
IM
IM
0
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-21
Data Formats and Data Records
B.11
Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
)
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Byte parameters (40)
4.0
BU - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
5.0
BU - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
6.0
BU - Output 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
7.0
Reserved
Byte
8.0
OP - LED green 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
9.0
OP - LED green 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
10.0
OP - LED green 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
11.0
OP - LED green 4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
12.0
OP - LED yellow 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
13.0
OP - LED yellow 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
14.0
OP - LED yellow 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
OP
15.0
Reserved
Byte
16.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.0
Byte
0 .. 255
105
Default: Status - ON < BU1/BU2
17.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.1
Byte
0 .. 255
106
Default: Status - OFF BU1/BU2
18.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.2
Byte
0 .. 255
107
Default: Status - ON > BU1/BU2
19.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.3
Byte
0 .. 255
128
Default: Event - Over- BU1/BU2
load operation
20.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.4
Byte
0 .. 255
110
Default: Status Interlocking time
active
21.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.5
Byte
0 .. 255
120
Default: Status BU1/BU2
Remote mode of operation
22.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.6
Byte
0 .. 255
96
Default: Status General fault
BU1/BU2
23.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.7
Byte
0 .. 255
97
Default: Status General warning
BU1/BU2
24.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.0
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
25.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
26.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
27.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
28.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
29.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.5
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
30.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.6
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
31.0
Cyclic send - Bit 1.7
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
32.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.0
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
33.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
34.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
35.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
36.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
0
0
BU1/BU2
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
B-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
37.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.5
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
38.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.6
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
39.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.7
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
40.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.0
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
41.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
42.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
43.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
44.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
45.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.5
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
46.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.6
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
47.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.7
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
48.0
Monitoring PLC/ DCS input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
49.0
Motor protection - Emergency start
Byte
0 .. 255
60
50.0
Reserved
Byte
51.0
Reserved
Byte
52.0
Mode selector S1
Byte
0 .. 255
53.0
Mode selector S2
Byte
54.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON<
55.0
56.0
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.4
IM
61
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.5
BU1/BU2
0 .. 255
2
Default: Fixed level
value "1"
BU1/BU2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
Control station - Local control [LC] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
57.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<
Byte
0 .. 255
56
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.0
58.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
57
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.1
59.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>
Byte
0 .. 255
58
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.2
60.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
61.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
0
62.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
63.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
64.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
0
65.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
66.0
Control function - ON<
Byte
0 .. 255
73
Default: General control station ON <
67.0
Control function - OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
74
Default: General control station OFF
68.0
Control function - ON>
Byte
0 .. 255
75
Default: General control station ON >
69.0
Control function - Feedback ON
Byte
0 .. 255
101
Default: Status Motor current flowing
70.0
External fault 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
71.0
External fault 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
72.0
External fault 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
0
0
Dependent
on the control
function
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-23
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
73.0
External fault 4 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
74.0
External fault 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
75.0
External fault 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
76.0
External fault 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
77.0
External fault 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
78.0
Cold starting (TPF)
Byte
0 .. 255
0
79.0
Test 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
59
80.0
Test 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
81.0
Reset 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
62
82.0
Reset 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
83.0
Reset 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
84.0
Reserved
Byte
0
85.0
Reserved
Byte
0
86.0
Reserved
Byte
0
87.0
Reserved
Byte
0
88.0
Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
89.0
Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
90.0
Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
91.0
Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
92.0
Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
93.0
Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
94.0
Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
95.0
Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
96.0
Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
97.0
Reserved
Byte
98.0
Timer 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
99.0
Timer 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
100.0
Timer 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
101.0
Timer 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
102.0
Counter 1 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
103.0
Counter 1 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
104.0
Counter 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
105.0
Counter 2 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
106.0
Counter 2 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
107.0
Counter 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
108.0
Signal conditioning 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
109.0
Signal conditioning 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
110.0
Signal conditioning 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
111.0
Signal conditioning 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
112.0
Non-volatile element 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
113.0
Non-volatile element 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
114.0
Non-volatile element 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.3
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.6
BU1/BU2
0
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
115.0
Non-volatile element 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
116.0
Flashing 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
117.0
Flashing 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
118.0
Flashing 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
119.0
Flickering 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
120.0
Flickering 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
121.0
Flickering 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1/BU2
122.0
Analog parameters (44)
122.0
PLC/DCS analog input
Byte
0 .. 255
16
123.0
Reserved
Byte
Default: Max. current BU1/BU2
I_max
0
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-25
Data Formats and Data Records
B.12
Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Bit parameters (17)
4.0
3UF50 compatibility mode
Bit
0, 1
0
4.1
3UF50 mode of operation
Bit
0, 1
0
4.2
Reserved
Bit
0
4.3
Reserved
Bit
0
4.4
Reserved
Bit
0
4.5
Reserved
Bit
0
4.6
Reserved
Bit
0
4.7
Reserved
Bit
0
5.0
Reserved
Bit
0
5.1
Reserved
Bit
0
5.2
Reserved
Bit
0
5.3
Reserved
Bit
5.4
Analog module - Measuring range
Input
Bit
0, 1
0
5.5
Analog module - Measuring range
Output
Bit
0, 1
0
5.6
Reserved
Bit
0
5.7
Reserved
Bit
0
6.0
Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 1
Bit
0, 1
0
6.1
Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 2
Bit
0, 1
0
6.2
Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 3
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = ">"
BU2
(overshooting)
1 = "<"
BU2
(undershooting)
BU2
6.3
Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 4
Bit
0, 1
0
BU2
6.4
Reserved
Bit
6.5
OPO level
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = NO conBU2
tact,
1 = NC contact
6.6
Positioner response for OPO
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = closed,
1 = open
6.7
Star-delta - Transformer mounting
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = delta
1 = in supply
cable
7.0
External fault 5 - Level
Bit
0, 1
0
7.1
External fault 6 - Level
Bit
0, 1
0
0 = NO contact, BU2
1 = NC contact BU2
7.2
Reserved
Bit
0
7.3
Reserved
Bit
0
BU2
0 = DPV0,
1 = DPV1
BU2
0
AM
0 = 0..20 mA
1 = 4 - 20 mA
AM
0
BU2
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
7.4
Monitoring external fault 5
Bit
0, 1
0
7.5
Monitoring external fault 6
Bit
0, 1
0
7.6
Reserved
Bit
0
7.7
Reserved
Bit
0
8.0
Reserved
Bit
0
8.1
Reserved
Bit
0
8.2
Reserved
Bit
0
8.3
Reserved
Bit
8.4
Timestamping active
Bit
8.5
Reserved
Bit
0
8.6
Reserved
Bit
0
8.7
Reserved
Bit
0
9.0
Reserved
Bit
0
9.1
Reserved
Bit
0
9.2
Reserved
Bit
0
9.3
Reserved
Bit
0
9.4
Reserved
Bit
0
9.5
Reserved
Bit
0
9.6
Reserved
Bit
0
9.7
Reserved
Bit
0
10.0
Bit[2] parameters (21)
10.0
3UF50 basic type
Bit[2]
10.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
10.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
10.6
UVO mode of operation
Bit[2]
0, 1
0
0 = deactivated,
1 = activated
11.0
Tripping monitoring U<
Bit[2]
1, 2
1
1 = on+
UM
(always, not
TPF)
2 = run (motor
ON, not TPF)
11.2
Warning monitoring U<
Bit[2]
1, 2
1
UM
11.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
11.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
12.0
Tripping monitoring
0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
12.2
Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
12.4
Tripping monitoring
0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
12.6
Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
13.0
Limit value 1 monitoring
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
13.2
Limit value 2 monitoring
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
13.4
Limit value 3 monitoring
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
13.6
Limit value 4 monitoring
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
0 = always
BU2
BU2
0
0, 1
0, 1, 2
0
BU2
0
BU2
BU2
0
0
0 = on
(always)
1 = on+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = run (motor
ON, not TPF)
3 = run+
(motor ON, not
TPF,
start hiding)
AM
AM
AM
AM
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-27
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
14.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
14.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
14.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
14.6
AM - Active inputs
Bit[2]
0, 1
15.0
DM - Debounce time inputs
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
15.2
AM - Response at open circuit
Bit[2]
15.4
EM - Response to an external earth Bit[2]
fault
15.6
EM - Response to warning of an
external earth fault
Bit[2]
16.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
16.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
16.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
16.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
17.0
TM - Tripping response T>
Bit[2]
1, 3
3
17.2
TM - Warning response T>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
2
17.4
TM - Response to a sensor error/
Out of range
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
2
17.6
TM - Active sensors
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
18.0
Tripping response P>
Bit[2]
18.2
Warning response P>
Bit[2]
18.4
Tripping response P<
18.6
Warning response P<
19.0
19.2
Note
Information
0
0
0=1 input
1=2 inputs
AM
1
Offset 6ms
DM1/DM2
1, 2, 3
2
1
0, 1, 2
0
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
AM
1, 3
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
TM
2
0 = 1 sensor
1 = 2 sensors
2= 3 sensors
TM
0, 1, 3
0
0
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
UM
0, 1, 2
Tripping response cos phi<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
UM
Warning response cos phi<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
UM
19.4
Tripping response U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
UM
19.6
Warning response U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
UM
20.0
Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
AM
20.2
Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
AM
20.4
Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
0
AM
20.6
Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0
AM
21.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
21.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
21.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
21.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
22.0
Response - External fault 5
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
22.2
Response - External fault 6
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
1
22.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
22.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
10 ms.
EM
EM
TM
TM
UM
UM
UM
0
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
BU2
BU2
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Unit
0, 1
Default
23.0
Recording of analog values - Trigger edge
Bit[2]
0
23.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
23.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
23.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
24.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
24.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
24.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
24.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
25.0
Timer 3 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
25.2
Timer 4 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
25.4
Signal conditioning 3 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
25.6
Signal conditioning 4 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
26.0
Non-volatile
element 3 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
26.2
Non-volatile
element 4 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0
26.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
26.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
27.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
27.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
27.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
27.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
28.0
Bit[4] parameters (25)
28.0
TM - Sensor type
Bit[3]
+bit
28.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
29.0
External fault 5 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
29.4
External fault 6 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
30.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
Note
0 = positive
1 = negative
Information
BU2
0
000B - 100B
000B
0 = with clsg. BU2
delay
BU2
1 = with clsg.
delay. &
mem.
2 = with OFF
delay
3 = with fleet.
clsg.
0 = non-inverting
1=
inverting
2 = rising edge
with memory
3 = falling
edge with
memory
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
000B = PT100, TM
001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
0
0101B Bit[0] =
panel reset,
0101B Bit[1] =
auto reset,
Bit[2] =
remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF
command
reset
BU2
BU2
0
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-29
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
30.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
31.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
31.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
32.0
Truth table 7 type 2I/1O
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0
BU2
32.4
Truth table 8 type 2I/1O
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0
BU2
33.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
33.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
34.0
Hysteresis P - cos phi - U
Bit[4]
0 - 15
5
1%
UM
34.4
Hysteresis 0/4 - 20 mA
Bit[4]
0 - 15
5
1%
AM
35.0
Hysteresis free limit values
Bit[4]
0 - 15
5
1%
BU2
35.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
0
36.0
Byte parameters (29)
36.0
Reserved
Byte
0
37.0
EM - Delay
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms.
5
EM
38.0
Trip level cos phi<
Byte
0 - 100
1%
0
UM
39.0
Warnung level cos phi<
Byte
0 - 100
1%
0
UM
40.0
Trip level U<
Byte
0 - 255
8V
0
UM
41.0
Warning level U<
Byte
0 - 255
8V
0
UM
42.0
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte
0 - 255
*128
0
AM
43.0
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte
0 - 255
*128
0
AM
44.0
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte
0 - 255
*128
0
AM
45.0
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte
0 - 255
*128
0
AM
46.0
Trip delay P>
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
47.0
Warning delay P>
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
48.0
Trip delay P<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
49.0
Warning delay P<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
50.0
Trip delay cos phi<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
51.0
Warning delay cos phi<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
52.0
Trip delay U<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
53.0
Warning delay U<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
UM
54.0
Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
AM
55.0
Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
AM
56.0
Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
AM
57.0
Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
AM
58.0
Limit value 1 delay
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
BU2
59.0
Limit value 2 delay
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
BU2
60.0
Limit value 3 delay
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
BU2
61.0
Limit value 4 delay
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
5
BU2
62.0
TM - Hysteresis
Byte
0 - 255
1K
5
63.0
Maximum time for star operation
Byte
0 - 255
1s
20
64.0
UVO time
Byte
0 - 255
100 ms
0
BU2
65.0
Staggering time
Byte
0 - 255
1s
0
BU2
0
0
0
TM
Star-delta
starter
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
0 - 20
Unit
5%
Default
Note
0
Information
66.0
Recording of analog values Pretrigger
Byte
BU2
67.0
Reserved
Byte
0
68.0
Reserved
Byte
0
69.0
Reserved
Byte
70.0
Truth table 4 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
0
BU2
71.0
Truth table 5 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
0
BU2
72.0
Truth table 6 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
0
BU2
73.0
Reserved
Byte
0
74.0
Reserved
Byte
0
75.0
Reserved
Byte
0
76.0
Word parameters (33)
76.0
Analog module - Start value output Word
0 .. 65535
0
78.0
Analog module - End value output
Word
0 .. 65535
27648 Value for 20
mA
AM
80.0
TM - Trip level T>
Word
0 .. 65535
1K
0
TM
82.0
TM - Warning level T>
Word
0 .. 65535
1K
0
TM
84.0
Limit monitor 1 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
86.0
Limit monitor 2 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
88.0
Limit monitor 3 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
90.0
Limit monitor 4 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
92.0
Timer 3 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
0
BU2
94.0
Timer 4 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
0
BU2
96.0
Counter 3 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
98.0
Counter 4 - Limit value
Word
0 .. 65535
0
BU2
100.0
Switching interval
Word
0 .. 65535
10 ms
0
102.0
Recording of analog values - Pretrigger
Word
1 .. 50000
1 ms
100
104.0
Reserved
Word
0
106.0
Reserved
Word
0
108.0
D-word parameters (37)
108.0
Overload protection - Set current
Ie2
D-word
0 .. 63000
112.0
Trip level P>
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
0
UM
116.0
Warning level P>
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
0
UM
120.0
Trip level P<
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
0
UM
124.0
Warning level P<
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
0
UM
128.0
Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 1
Bit[32]
0 .. 1..1B
0
BU2
132.0
Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 2
Bit[32]
0 .. 1..1B
0
BU2
136.0
Reserved
D-word
0
140.0
Reserved
D-word
0
0
10 mA
Value for 0/4
mA
AM
BU2
0
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-31
Data Formats and Data Records
B.13
Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2
(Plug
)
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Byte parameters (41)
4.0
DM1 - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
DM1
5.0
DM1 - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
DM1
6.0
DM2 - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
DM2
7.0
DM2 - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
DM2
8.0
Reserved
Byte
0
9.0
Reserved
Byte
0
10.0
Reserved
Byte
0
11.0
Reserved
Byte
12.0
Timestamping - Input 0
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
13.0
Timestamping - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
14.0
Timestamping - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
15.0
Timestamping - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
16.0
Timestamping - Input 4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
17.0
Timestamping - Input 5
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
18.0
Timestamping - Input 6
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
19.0
Timestamping - Input 7
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
20.0
Recording of analog values - Trigger input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
21.0
Reserved
Byte
22.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON<<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
23.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
24.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
25.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
26.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
27.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
28.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
29.0
Control station - Operator panel
[OP]<>/ <<>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
30.0
Control function - ON<<
Byte
0 .. 255
0
31.0
Control function - ON>>
Byte
0 .. 255
0
32.0
Auxiliary control input - FC
Byte
0 .. 255
0
33.0
Auxiliary control input - FO
Byte
0 .. 255
0
34.0
Auxiliary control input - TC
Byte
0 .. 255
0
35.0
Auxiliary control input - TO
Byte
0 .. 255
0
36.0
External fault 5 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
37.0
External fault 6 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
38.0
Reserved
Byte
0
39.0
Reserved
Byte
0
0
0
Dependent
on the
control
function
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
B-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
40.0
External fault 5 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
41.0
External fault 6 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
42.0
Reserved
Byte
0
43.0
Reserved
Byte
0
44.0
UVO error
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
45.0
OPO error
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
46.0
Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
47.0
Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
48.0
Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
49.0
Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
50.0
Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
51.0
Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
52.0
Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
53.0
Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
54.0
Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
55.0
Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
56.0
Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
57.0
Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
58.0
Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
59.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
60.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
61.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 3
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
62.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 4
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
63.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 5
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
64.0
Timer 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
65.0
Timer 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
66.0
Timer 4 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
67.0
Timer 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
68.0
Counter 3 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
69.0
Counter 3 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
70.0
Counter 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
71.0
Counter 4 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
72.0
Counter 4 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
73.0
Counter 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
74.0
Signal conditioning 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
75.0
Signal conditioning 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
76.0
Signal conditioning 4 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
77.0
Signal conditioning 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
78.0
Non-volatile element 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
79.0
Non-volatile element 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
80.0
Non-volatile element 4 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
81.0
Non-volatile element 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU2
82.0
Reserved
Byte
0
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-33
Data Formats and Data Records
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
83.0
Reserved
Byte
0
84.0
Reserved
Byte
0
85.0
Reserved
Byte
0
86.0
Reserved
Byte
0
87.0
Reserved
Byte
0
88.0
Analog parameters (45)
88.0
Analog module - Output
Byte
0 - 255
0
AM
89.0
Analog input limit value 1
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
90.0
Analog input limit value 2
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
91.0
Analog input limit value 3
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
92.0
Analog input limit value 4
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
93.0
Reserved
Byte
94.0
Recording of analog values - Analog input
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
95.0
PLC/DCS analog input 2
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
96.0
PLC/DCS analog input 3
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
97.0
PLC/DCS analog input 4
Byte
0 - 255
0
BU2
98.0
Reserved
Byte
0
99.0
Reserved
Byte
0
0
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.14
Data Record 139 - Marking
The diagnostics
• External fault 1 to 6 (events, warnings and faults)
• Limit value 1 to 4 (events)
• TM warning T>/tripping T> (events, warnings and faults)
• Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (events, warnings and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot,
etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device.
These can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with
SIMOCODE ES. The texts have no functionality.
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Reserved
Byte[6]
10.0
Marking - External fault 1
Byte[10]
BU1/BU2
20.0
Marking - External fault 2
Byte[10]
BU1/BU2
30.0
Marking - External fault 3
Byte[10]
BU1/BU2
40.0
Marking - External fault 4
Byte[10]
BU1/BU2
50.0
Marking - External fault 5
Byte[10]
BU2
60.0
Marking - External fault 6
Byte[10]
BU2
70.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
80.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
90.0
Marking - Limit value 1
Byte[10]
BU2
100.0
Marking - Limit value 2
Byte[10]
BU2
110.0
Marking - Limit value 3
Byte[10]
BU2
120.0
Marking - Limit value 4
Byte[10]
BU2
130.0
Marking - TM warning T>
Byte[10]
BU2
140.0
Marking - TM tripping T>
Byte[10]
BU2
150.0
Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte[10]
BU2
160.0
Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte[10]
BU2
170.0
Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA>
Byte[10]
BU2
180.0
Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<
Byte[10]
BU2
190.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
Table B-15: Data record 139 - Marking
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-35
Data Formats and Data Records
B.15
Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters
Attention
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automatically. The current baud rate is read.
Byte
Specification
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Station address
Byte
5.0
Baud rate
Byte
6.0 to 11.0
Reserved
Byte[6]
Information
BU1/BU2
Table B-16: Data record 160 - Communication parameters
B.16
Data Record 165 - Comments
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
System designation
Byte[32]
36.0
Location identification
Byte[22]
58.0
Date
Byte[16]
74.0
Reserved
Byte[38]
112.0
Comment
Byte[54]
Information
BU1/BU2
Table B-17: Data record 165 - Comments
SIMOCODE pro
B-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.17
Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive
Description
The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is
available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0
Bit
4.1
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.1
Bit
4.2
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.2
Bit
4.3
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.3
Bit
4.4
Acyclic Receive - v 0.4
Bit
4.5
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.5
Bit
4.6
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.6
Bit
4.7
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.7
Bit
5.0
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.0
Bit
5.1
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.1
Bit
5.2
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.2
Bit
5.3
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.3
Bit
5.4
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.4
Bit
5.5
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.5
Bit
5.6
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.6
Bit
5.7
Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.7
Bit
6.0
Acyclic Receive - Analog value
Word
Information
BU1/BU2
Table B-18: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-37
Data Formats and Data Records
B.18
Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send
Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The signaling data
is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
0.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.0
Bit
0.1
Acyclic send - Bit 0.1
Bit
0.2
Acyclic send - Bit 0.2
Bit
0.3
Acyclic send - Bit 0.3
Bit
0.4
Acyclic send - Bit 0.4
Bit
0.5
Acyclic send - Bit 0.5
Bit
0.6
Acyclic send - Bit 0.6
Bit
0.7
Acyclic send - Bit 0.7
Bit
1.0
Acyclic send - Bit 1.0
Bit
1.1
Acyclic send - Bit 1.1
Bit
1.2
Acyclic send - Bit 1.2
Bit
1.3
Acyclic send - Bit 1.3
Bit
1.4
Acyclic send - Bit 1.4
Bit
1.5
Acyclic send - Bit 1.5
Bit
1.6
Acyclic send - Bit 1.6
Bit
1.7
Acyclic send - Bit 1.7
Bit
Information
BU1/BU2
Table B-19: Data record 203 - Acyclic send
SIMOCODE pro
B-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.19
Data Record 224 - Password Protection
Beschreibung
• Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, "Password protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event "Event Password false" is set and no change is carried out.
• Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Password false" is
set and no change is carried out.
Byte.Bit
Specification
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF
1 = password protection ON
Bit
4.1
Reserved
Bit[31]
8.0
Password
Byte[8]
16.0
Reserved
Byte[8]
Information
BU1/BU2
BU1/BU2
Table B-20: Data record 224 - Password protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-39
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20
Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for
Predefined Control Functions
B.20.1
Overload Relay
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Not connected
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Not connected
Not connected
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-21: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Overload relay
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.2
Direct Starter
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Not connected
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Direct starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-41
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.3
Reversing Starter
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Interlocking time active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Reversing starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.4
Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Not connected
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Circuit breaker (MCCB)
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-43
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.5
Star-delta Starter
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - star-delta starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.6
Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Status - Interlocking time active
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-45
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.7
Dahlander
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-27: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.8
Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Status - ON <<
Not connected
Status ON <
Status - Interlocking time active
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-47
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.9
Pole-changing Switch
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.10
Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Switching interval active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Status - ON <<
Not connected
Status ON <
Status - Interlocking time active
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-49
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.11
Valve
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Closed
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Open
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Status - OFF (closed)
Status - ON> (open)
Not connected
Not connected
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-31: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Valve
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-50
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.12
Positioner
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Closed
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Stopped
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Open
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON< (closed)
Status - OFF (stopped)
Status - ON> (open)
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Interlocking time active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Status - positioner opens
Not connected
Status - positioner closes
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Positioner
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-51
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.13
Soft Starter
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Not connected
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
B-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Data Formats and Data Records
B.20.14
Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value)
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)(
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value)
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Status - Interlocking time active
Status - Remote mode of operation
Status - General fault
Status - General warning
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter with reversing contactor
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B-53
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-54
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
C
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• technicians.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-1
Dimension Drawings
3UF70 Basic Unit
C.1.1
SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit
5
80
106
12
C.1
5
45
36
86
SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit
5
80
106
12
C.1.2
4
45
5
65
115
4
SIMOCODE pro
C-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
3UF710 Current Measuring Modules
C.2.1
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A ,
84
C.2
5
45
40
7,5
T1
T2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
38
T3
C-3
Dimension Drawings
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
94
C.2.2
55
5
67
14
T3
T2
65
T1
SIMOCODE pro
C-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
C.2.3
Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A,
120
79
95
95
5
140
78
7
25
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-5
Dimension Drawings
C.2.4
Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
9
17
79
95
119
37
7
5
47
84
140
SIMOCODE pro
C-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
C.2.5
Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A
145
50
25
85
122
147
57
11
125
9
6
148
6
60,5
60,5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-7
Dimension Drawings
C.3
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
C.3.1
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
45
85
5
7
21
31
66
11
SIMOCODE pro
C-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
C.3.2
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A
55
94
5
20
12
23
60
92
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-9
Dimension Drawings
C.3.3
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A
SIMOCODE pro
C-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
C.3.4
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
37
9
17
79
79
95
119
Ø
5
95
120
47
3
140
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-11
Dimension Drawings
C.3.5
Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A
48
25
122
147
88
1
Ø1
Ø1
1
32
125
67
149
6
145
SIMOCODE pro
C-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
96
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
29
3UF7200 Operator Panel
36
C.4
8
29
7
C-13
Dimension Drawings
Expansion Modules
68
92
10
C.5
22,5
5
115
4
110
15
Versions:
• 3UF73 digital modules
• 3UF7500 earth-fault module
• 3UF7700 temperature module
• 3UF7400 analog module
SIMOCODE pro
C-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Dimension Drawings
Accessories
C.6.1
Door adapter
37
3
17
Ø
1,7
R3
,7
R1
,5
1,7
21
39
46
13,4
C.6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C-15
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Technical Data
D
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D-1
Technical Data
D.1
Common Technical Data
Permiss. ambient temperature
In operation
-25 °C - +60 °C
During storage and transport
-40 °C - +80 °C
Site height above sea level
<2,000 m
<3,000 m
Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)
<4,000 m
Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection (according
to IEC 60529)
All components (except current
measuring modules, rail connection,
operator panel and door adapter)
IP20
Current measuring module with
rail connection
IP00
Operator panel (front) and door
adapter (front) with cover
IP54
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
15 g/11 ms
Installation location
Arbitrary
Frequencies
50/60 Hz ± 5%
EMC stability
according to IEC 60947-1
Corresponds to Degree of severity 3
Conducted interference signal
injection, burst according to
IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV (power ports)
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference signal
injection, burst according to IEC
61000-4-5
2 kV (line to earth)
1 kV (line to earth)
Electrostatic discharging,
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV (air discharge)
6 kV (contact discharge)
Field-related interference signal
injection according to
IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m
Overvoltage limiter is required for inductive loads.
EMC emitted interference
according to IEC 60947-1
This is a Class A product. This product can
cause radio interference if used in a domestic environment. The user must provide
suitable countermeasures if required.
Conducted and emitted
interference
DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
(corresponds to Degree of severity A)
Safe isolation
according to IEC 60947-1
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double creepage distance and air gap.
Attention
Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test
report, No. 2668
SIMOCODE pro
D-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Technical Data
D.2
Technical Data of the Basic Units
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED
• Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/DCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
TEST/RESET" button
• Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module, addressing plug
System interfaces
• Front
For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The
memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be
connected to the system interface for carrying out parameterization.
• Bottom
For connecting a current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module
PROFIBUS DP interface
• Interface design
• Connection technology
RS485
9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section like control circuit
For connecting a PROFIBUS DP cable using the terminal connection or the 9-pole SUB-D socket.
Rated control voltage Us (according to DIN EN 61131-2)
110 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
Operating range
0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us
0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us
• Basic unit 1 (3UF7000)
7 VA
5W
• Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)
(including two expansion modules
connected to basic unit 2)
10 VA
7W
Rated insulation voltage Ui
300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage strength
Uimp
4 kV
Power consumption
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D-3
Technical Data
Relay outputs:
• Number
3 monostable relay outputs
• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay
outputs
The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal conditioning), of which 2 relay outputs have a common root and one is separate, can be freely
assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of the operating state).
• Mandatory short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay
outputs)
• Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current
5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated switching capacity
AC-15
DC-13
Inputs (binary)
4 inputs with a common root that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local
control, key-operated switch, limit switch, ...) and
can be freely assigned to the control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve
6 A/ 24 V AC
2 A/ 24 V DC
6 A/ 120 V AC
0.55 A/ 60 V DC
3 A/ 230 V AC
0.25 A/ 125 V DC
300 m
Type 1 according to EN 611312
Thermistor motor protection
(binary PTC)
• Total cold resistance
< 1.5 kOhm
• Response value
3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm
• Return value
1.5 kOhm -1.65 kOhm
• Cable lengths
Cross section:2.5 mm2
1.5 mm 2
0.5 mm2
Lengths:2 x 250 m
2 x 150 m
2 x 50 m
Connection
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Power failure stored-energy time
(Longer power failures lead to a
shut-off of the relay outputs
(monostable))
• SIMOCODE pro C DC 24 V
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V
• SIMOCODE pro V DC 24 V
• SIMOCODE pro V AC/DC 110 V - 240 V
typ. 50 ms
typ. 200 ms
SIMOCODE pro
D-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Technical Data
D.3
Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules
and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Mounting
• Set current le = 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
• Set current le = 20 A -200 A
(3UF7103, 3UF7 113)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw
attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the contactor
• Set current le = 63 A -630 A
(3UF7104, 3UF7 114)
Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the
contactor
System interface
For connection to a basic unit
Main circuit
• Set current I e
3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A
3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A -25 A
3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A -100 A
• Rated insulation voltage Ui (for
Degree of pollution 3)
690 V
• Rated operational voltage Ue
690 V
• Rated surge voltage strength Uimp 6 kV
• Measurement frequency
50/60 Hz
• Type of current
Three-phase current
• Short circuit
Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit
required 1)
• Accuracy of the current measuring
(in the range 1x the minimum set
current Iu to 8 x the maximum set
current Io)
+/- 3%
Typical measuring range of the
voltage measuring
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line 110 V - 690 V
voltage (e.g. UL1L2)
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1)
65 V - 400 V
Accuracy of the
• voltage measuring in the range
230 V - 400 V
• power factor (cos phi) measurement
• apparent power measurement
+/- 3% (typical)
+/-5% (typical)
+/-5% (typical)
Notes on voltage measuring
• Grounded network
• Rated control
voltage Us
Suitable for three-phase current networks with grounded neutral point
An earthed ground or a neutral conductor is necessary
Push-through opening
Diameter
• Set current 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A
7.5 mm
• Set current 10 A -100 A
14.0 mm
• Set current 20 A -200 A
25.0 mm
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D-5
Technical Data
Rail connection 2)
• Set current Ie
20 A -200 A
63 A -630 A
• Connection screw
M8x20
M10x30
• Tightening torque
10 Nm - 14 Nm
2
14 Nm -24 Nm
2 3
• Solid with cable lug
16 mm - 95 mm ) )
50 mm2 -240 mm2) 4)
• Stranded with cable lug
25 mm2 -120 mm2) 3)
70 mm2 -240 mm2) 4)
• AWG cable
6 kcmil - 300 kcmil
1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measuring
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
1) More information is available at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with
Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V" on page D-11.
2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable 3RT19 box terminal.
3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs
complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2.
4) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs
complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 as well as when connecting
cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2.
SIMOCODE pro
D-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Technical Data
D.4
Technical Data of the Expansion Modules
D.4.1
Technical Data of the Digital Modules
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED
• Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage
strength Uimp
4 kV
Relay outputs
• Number
• Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay
outputs
• Mandatory short-circuit protection for auxiliary
contacts (relay outputs)
• Rated uninterrupted current
• Rated switching capacity
Inputs (binary)
2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type)
The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal conditioning) whose relay outputs all have a common root can be freely assigned to control
functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of
the operating state).
• Fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
AC-15
6 A/ 24 V AC
6 A/ 120 V AC
3 A/ 230 V AC
DC-13
2 A/ 24 V DC
0.55 A/ 60 V DC 0.25 A/ 125 V DC
4 externally supplied isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V
AC/DC depending on the type) have inputs with a common
root for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switches, limit switches, ...) and can be freely assigned
to the control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve
300 m
Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
• 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve
200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
—
Connection
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D-7
Technical Data
D.4.2
Technical Data of the Analog Module
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED
• Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Type of connection:
2-wire connection
Inputs:
• Channels
2 (passive)
• Parameterizable measuring ranges
0/4 mA - 20 mA
• Cable shielding
Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and
required for cables over 30 m
• Max. input current
(destruction limit)
40 mA
• Accuracy of the
1%
• Input resistance
50 Ohm
• Conversion time
130 ms.
• Resolution
12 bit
• Open circuit recognition
For the measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA
Output:
• Channels
1
• Parameterizable output range
0/4 mA - 20 mA
• Cable shielding
Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and
required for cables over 30 m
• Max. output voltage
30 V DC
• Accuracy of the
1%
• Max. output load
500 Ohm
• Conversion time
10 ms.
• Resolution
12 bit
• Short-circuit proof
Yes
Isolation of the inputs/output from
the electronics
No
Connection:
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
D-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Technical Data
D.4.3
Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED
• Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation
current transformer with rated
fault currents IN
• IEarth fault < 50% IN
• IEarth fault > 100% IN
0.3/0.5/1 A
Response delay
300 ms - 500 ms, with additional delay
No tripping
Tripping
Connection:
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
D.4.4
Technical Data of the Temperature Module
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED
• Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Sensor circuit
Typical sensor current:
• PT100
1 mA (typical)
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit recognition/shortcircuit recognition/measuring
range:
• PT100/PT1000
Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +500°C
• KTY83-110
Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +175°C
• KTY84
Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 °C - +300°C
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D-9
Technical Data
• NTC
Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C - +160°C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature of 20°C (T20)
<+ 2 K
Deviation due to ambient temperature (as % of measuring range)
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Connection:
• Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
D.5
Technical Data of the Operator Panel
Mounting
Installation in a switchgear cabinet door and/or in a front panel,
with IP54 system interface covering
Display
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED
• Green:
• Flashing green:
• Red: blocked
• OFF:
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Function test was negative, device is
blocked"
"No control supply voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED
• Continuous light:
• Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/DCS"
"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED
Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
• 3 yellow LEDs/4 green LEDs
Can be freely assigned to any status signals
Buttons
• Test/reset
• Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module, addressing plug
• Control buttons
• Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
• Front
For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a
PC cable for parameterization
• Rear
For joining a connection cable to the basic unit or the expansion
module
SIMOCODE pro
D-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
225
265
300
400
500
225
265
300
400
500
630
630
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1264
3RT1265
3RT1266
3RT1275
3RT1276
3TF68 2)
3TF69 2)
10-100A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
20-200A
63-630A
5,0
6,5
9.0
6,5
12,0
17,0
18,0
25,0
25,0
3,0
3,0
/ 32,0
/ 40,0
/ 50,0
/ 65,0
/ 80,0
/ 95,0
/ 100,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
20,0
24,0
24,0
47,0
58,0
58,0
100,0
4,0
5,2
6,3
5,2
9,0
13,0
13,0
20,0
24,0
3,0
3,0
/ 690V
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
225
265
280
400
450
225
265
300
400
500
630
630 / 630
225
265
300
400
500
225
265
300
400
500
630
630
182
215
243
324
405
225
265
300
400
500
502
93,2
122
150
25,5
33,0
38,5
56,0
61,0
69,0
93,2
100,0
7,0
9,0
11,0
9,0
12,0
17,0
18,0
25,0
25,0
3,0
3,0
5,0
6,5
9,0
6,5
12,0
17,0
18,0
25,0
25,0
3,0
3,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
630
182
215
243
324
405
225
265
300
400
500
502
93,2
122
150
/ 25,5
/ 33,0
/ 38,5
/ 56,0
/ 61,0
/ 69,0
/ 93,2
/ 100,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
400V / 500V
15
4,0
5,2
6,3
5,2
9,0
13,0
13,0
20,0
24,0
3,0
3,0
7,0
9,0
10,0
9,0
12,0
16,0
16,0
22,3
25,0
3,0
3,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
630
182
215
243
324
405
225
265
300
400
500
502
93,2
122
150
572
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
81,7 /
107 /
131 /
160
188
213
284
355
225
265
300
400
500
440
5,0
6,5
9,0
6,5
12,0
16,0
16,0
22,3
25,0
3,0
3,0
4,0
5,2
6,3
5,2
9,0
13,0
13,0
20,0
24,0
3,0
3,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
160
188
213
284
355
225
265
300
400
500
440
572
572
160
188
213
284
355
225
265
300
400
500
440
81,7
107
131
/ 20,0
/ 24,0
/ 24,0
/ 47,0
/ 53,0
/ 58,0
/ 81,7
/ 100,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
20,3
28,0
29,4
45,0
47,0
53,0
74,8
97,5
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
20,0
24,0
24,0
45,0
47,0
53,0
74,8
97,5
9,0
13,0
13,0
20,3
24,0
19,1
26,5
26,5
41,7
45,0
50,0
69,0
90,0
12,0
14,0
14,0
19,1
25,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
7,0 /
9,0 /
9,0 /
3,0 /
3,0 /
/ 690V
19,1
26,5
26,5
41,7
45,0
50,0
69,0
90,0
12,0
14,0
14,0
19,1
25,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
19,1
24,0
24,0
41,7
45,0
50,0
69,0
90,0
9,0
13,0
13,0
19,1
24,0
5,0 / 4,0
6,5
5,2
9,0 / 6,3
3,0 / 3,0
3,0 / 3,0
400V / 500V
30
17,6
25,0
25,0
38,2
43,0
47,0
63,0
82,0
12,0
13,0
13,0
17,6
25,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
7,0 /
9,0 /
9,0 /
3,0 /
3,0 /
/ 690V
17,6
25,0
25,0
38,2
43,0
47,0
63,0
82,0
12,0
13,0
13,0
17,6
25,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
17,6
24,0
24,0
38,2
43,0
47,0
63,0
82,0
9,0
13,0
13,0
17,6
24,0
5,0 / 4,0
6,5 / 5,2
9,0 / 6,3
3,0 / 3,0
3,0 / 3,0
400V / 500V
35
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
146
172
195
260
325
194
228
258
344
430
408
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
146
172
195
260
325
194
228
258
344
430
408
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
500 /
135
159
180
240
300
173
204
231
316
385
376
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
135
159
180
240
300
173
204
231
316
385
376
500 / 500
135
159
180
240
300
173
204
231
316
385
376
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
469 /
340 /
344 /
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
469 / 469
340 / 340
344 / 344
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
438 /
316 /
317 /
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
74
93
16,1
23,5
23,5
34,5
40,0
44,0
57,0
74,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
16,1
23,5
7,0 /
8,5 /
8,5 /
3,0 /
3,0 /
/ 690V
16,1
23,5
23,5
34,5
40,0
44,0
57,0
74,0
9,0
12,0
12,0
16,1
23,5
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
/ 74
/ 93
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
438 / 438
316 / 316
317 / 317
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
74
93
16,1
23,5
23,5
34,5
40,0
44,0
57,0
74,0
12,0
12,0
12,0
16,1
23,5
5,0 / 4,0
6,5
5,2
8,5 / 6,3
3,0 / 3,0
3,0 / 3,0
400V / 500V
40
NEOZED
400
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
800
800
5004)
6304)
800
315
315
315
63
63
80
125
160
160
315
315
20
20
20
25
25
25
35
63
63
20
20
5)
500
500
500
630
630
500
500
500
800
800
800
355
355
355
125
125
160
200
200
200
355
355
35
35
35
63
63
63
100
125
125
35
35
Type of coordination
1
2
gL(gG)
Operating class
Type 5SB
Type 5SE
DIAZED
3)
Type 3NA
NH
and must be suitable for further operation. There is danger of contact welding.
They are not suitable for further operation until they have been repaired or the respective parts have been replaced.
Type of coordination “2”: Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit
5) Assignment and short-circuit devices according to IEC60947-4-1
Type of coordination “1” : Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit.
531 / 531 / 531
146
172
195
260
325
194
228
258
344
430
408
74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 69,0 / 69,0 / 69,0 64,0 / 64,0 / 64,0
98 / 98 / 98
90 / 90 / 90 82 / 82 / 82
120 / 120 / 120 111 / 111 / 111 102 / 102 / 102
20,3
28,0
29,4
45,0
47,0
53,0
74,8
97,5
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
12,0
15,0
15,0
20,3
25,0
12,0
15,0
15,0
20,3
25,0
/ 5,0 / 4,0
/ 6,5
5,2
/ 9,0 / 6,3
/ 3,0 / 3,0
/ 3,0 / 3,0
/ 690V
7,0
9,0
9,5
3,0
3,0
400V / 500V
Test current “r”
/ 690V
81,7 /
107 /
131 /
/ 22,3
/ 29,4
/ 32,7
/ 49,0
/ 53,0
/ 59,0
/ 81,7
/ 100,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
400V / 500V
/ 20,0 22,3
/ 24,0 29,4
/ 24,0 32,7
/ 47,0 49,0
/ 58,0 53,0
/ 58,0 59,0
/ 93,2 81,7
/ 100,0 100,0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/ 690V
25
CLASS
Rated operating current Ie/AC-3 in A for
20
1) Can be mounted on contactors (after demounting the box terminal block)
2) Cannot be mounted on contactors
3) Observe operating voltage
4) Ensure that the safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating current and the fuse rating is sufficient.
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
115,0 / 115,0 / 115,0
150 / 150 / 150
185 / 185 / 170
32,0
40,0
50,0
65,0
80,0
95,0
100,0
7,0
9,0
12,0
9,0
12,0
17,0
25,0
25,0
25,0
3RT1015
3RT1016
3RT1017
3RT1023
3RT1024
3RT1025
3RT1026
3RT1034
3RT1035
2.4 - 25A
3,0
3,0
3RT1015
3RT1016
0.3 - 3.0A
400V / 500V
5 a.10
690V
Fast fuse links
D.6
Setting range
(Type)
Ovrload relay Contactor
Short-circuit protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders
for Short-circuit Currents up to 50kA and 690V
for 3UF7
Version:January 20, 2005
Technical Data
Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders
for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
D-11
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example Circuits
E
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find circuit examples for the following parameterizable
control functions:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter
• Reversing starter
• Circuit breaker (MCCB)
• Star-delta starter
• Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Dahlander
• Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Pole-changing switch
• Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Valve
• Positioner
• Soft starter
• Soft starter with reversing contactor.
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners
• configurators
• mechanics
• electricians
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1, SIMOCODE pro
system manual)
• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-1
Example Circuits
E.1
General
Target of the example circuits
The examples will
• show you how to implement a circuit for each control function
with SIMOCODE pro
• help you modify these examples for your respective application
• help you to easily implement other applications.
Important steps
• Implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching devices and control and signaling devices)
(see circuit diagrams).
• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control
and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro
wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphics
editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
• Setting of the cyclic control and signaling data for the communication of
SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the "Assignment of cyclic control and signaling data" tables).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Load feeder/motor present
PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
The main circuit is already wired
PC/programming device is present
The SIMOCODE ES software is installed
The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In the "Configuring the
basic factory default settings" section of the SIMOCODE pro manual, you will
learn how to implement the basic factory default settings.
SIMOCODE pro
E-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example Circuits
E.2
Example for the "overload relay" circuit
E.2.1
Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-3
7
4
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
;
;
.
,! ,! ,!
;
%8
37&
;
,1
%DVLF8QLW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
,1
6,02&2'(SUR&9
3URILEXV'3
$
3(
0 3(
$&
$
;
63(3(
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9
:
&7
7
7
352),%86
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
9$&
%
$
$
9
$
%
$
%
;
287
1$&+]9
/
1
287
&$
+
)
1$&+]9
/
1
287
,!
6<6
13($&+]9
3(
!
E-4
!
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-1: Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.2.2
Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
Figure E-2: Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-5
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
;
;
.
) ) ) %8
/
/
/
4
37&
;
6
;
,1
%DVLF8QLW
6
'2/
,1
6,02&2'(SUR&9
3URILEXV'3
;
352),%86
$
%
3(
0 3(
$&
$
7
7
63(3(
;
&7
$
%
$
%
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
)
9$&
&$
)
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
2Q
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
.
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
$
9
13($&+]9
7
7
7
8
9
:
1$&+]9
/
1
)
287
287
$
%86
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
21
2))
*(1)$8/7
7(67
5(6(7
Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
E.3.1
Example for the "direct starter" circuit
E.3
$
$
E-6
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-3: Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
3(
Example Circuits
E.3.2
Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
Figure E-4: Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-7
7
;
;
.
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
4
;
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
3(
0 3(
$&
.
$
37&
;
6
,1
6
%DVLF8QLW
6,02&2'(SUR&9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
13($&+]9
&7
7
7
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
5XQVLJQDOULJKW
/RFDO
5XQVLJQDOOHIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5XQVLQJDOOHIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5XQVLJQDOULJKW
.
&$
.
)
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
$
9
$
%
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
$
$
%
$
%
8
9
:
287
$
%86
21
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
7(67
5(6(7
Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
3(
E.4.1
Example for a "reversing starter" circuit
E.4
$
$
E-8
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-5: Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.4.2
Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
Figure E-6: Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-9
7
4
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
;
) ) ) 0
;
%8
$
37&
;
6
;
,1
,1
6
%DVLF8QLW
6,02&2'(SUR9
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
/
/
/
7
7
7
&7
7
7
$
%
$
%
&
4
,1
4
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
&
)
287
4
&$
)
0
287
;
,! ,! ,!
$
%86
;
21
2))
*(1)$8/7
;
;
;
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
7(67
5(6(7
E.5.1
Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
/RFDO
287
0
4
Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
/RFDO
2Q
)
1$&+]9
/
1
E.5
)HHGEDFN
&%5UHOHDVHG
)HHGEDFN
&%5RQ
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU0&&%RII
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU0&&%RQ
9$&
$
352),%86
9
$
$
$
;
&
&
;
;
$
$
$
;
$
%
1$&+]9
/
1
;
;
;
;
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
;
'
'
;
;
;
;
;
;
E-10
6<6
13($&+]9
Example Circuits
Figure E-7: Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.5.2
Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
Figure E-8: Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-11
;
.
7
4
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
:
:
9 0 9
8 $& 8
0
;
.
7
7
7
;
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
$
&7
3(
37&
.
,1
,1
6
%DVLF8QLW
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
6
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
;
7
7
$
$
$
.
287
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
.
287
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
/RFDO
2II
.
)
&$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
9$&
,1
,!
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
1$&+]9
/
1
/RFDO
2Q
&
&
&
$
%
&
'
'
$
%
$
%
&
$
$
$
$
9
'
'
13($&+]9
$
%86
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
21
2))
*(1)$8/7
7(67
5(6(7
Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit
3(
E.6.1
3(
Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit
E.6
6<6
$
$
$
$
E-12
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-9: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.6.2
Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"
Figure E-10: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-13
7
,! ,! ,!
;
3(
;
:
:
9 0 9
8 $& 8
.
0
./
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
7
.5
4
;
7
7
$
&7
/
/
/
37&
.
,1
%DVLF8QLW
;
6
3URILEXV'3
;
352),%86
$
%
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
3(
7
7
3(
63(3(
6
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
'
'
,!
287
287
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
/RFDO
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/HIW
./
.
,!
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
.
287
&$
)
9$&
$
$
9
$
%
$
.5
$
10
,1
$
'(9,&(
%86
21
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
6<6
$
%
&
6<6
$
$
$
$
$
$
&
&
&
&
'
'
$
$
$
$
287
,1
9$&
,1
7(67
5(6(7
287
,1
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
1$&+]9
/
1
3(
6<6
5HDG\
$
$
1$&+]9
/
1
13($&+]9
6<6
E-14
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
E.7
Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" circuit
E.7.1
Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of
rotation"
Figure E-11: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.7.2
Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation"
Figure E-12: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-15
;
.
7
4
;
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
13($&+]9
) ) ) %8
/
/
/
0
:
9 0 9
$&
8
8
:
;
.
7
7
7
3(
$
37&
.
,1
3URILEXV'3
%DVLF8QLW
;
6
352),%86
6
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
0%
;
7
7
63(3(
6
,1
&$
)
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&
&7
3(
$
%
$
%
)
9$&
1$&+]9
/
1
287
)
/RFDO
6ORZ
/RFDO
2II
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
/RFDO
)DVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
.
287
.
&$
)
.
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
%
$
$
9
$
$
$
$
$
&
$
21!!
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&( %86
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
7(67
5(6(7
Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
E.8.1
&
Example for the "Dahlander" circuit
E.8
'
'
&
&
$
$
'
'
$
$
$
$
E-16
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-13: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.8.2
Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
Figure E-14: Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-17
;
.5
7
4
) ) ) 3(
;
.5
0
:
:
9 0 9
$&
8
8
./
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
/
/
/
7
7
7
./
37&
$
#4
;
.
,1
"ASIC5NIT
6
,1
3)-/#/$%PRO6
;
6
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
;
13($&+]9
6
,1
,1
$EVICE
"53
'ENFAULT
4ESTRESET
&$
)
)
.5
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
.5
&$
)
1$&+]9
/
1
)
287
.
287
6<6
$
3(
;
,1
6
10
./
$
287
6
,1
./
,1
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
9$&
%86
21
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
!!!
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
,1
287
7(67
5(6(7
/RFDO
)DVW
/HIW
/RFDO
6ORZ
/HIW
/RFDO
)DVW
5LJKW
/RFDO
6ORZ
5LJKW
/RFDO
2II
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
/HIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
/HIW
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
5LJKW
Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the
direction of rotation" circuit
E.9.1
Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation"
3(
E.9
3(
7
7
$
%
63(3(
$
%
'
'
$
$
9
$
%
&
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
&
&
'
'
$
$
6<6
$
$
$
%
$
%
6<6
$
$
5HDG\
%
&
&
6<6
E-18
%
%
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-15: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.9.2
Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation"
Figure E-16: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-19
Example Circuits
Figure E-17: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
SIMOCODE pro
E-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example Circuits
E.10
Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit
E.10.1
Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-21
;
.
7
4
;
,! ,! ,!
%8
:
:
9 0 9
8 $& 8
0
;
.
3(
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
/
/
/
7
7
7
3(
13($&+]9
$
37&
7
;
%DVLF8QLW
6
6
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
6ORZ
/RFDO
)DVW
,!
287
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
1$&+]9
/
1
.
)
&$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
.
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
&
&7
7
3(
$
%
$
%
$
$
$
'
'
$
$
9
$
%
&
&
&
&
$
$
'
'
$
$
287
E-22
$
'(9,&(
%86
21!!
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
7(67
5(6(7
Example Circuits
Figure E-18: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.10.2
Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
Figure E-19: Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-23
;
.5
7
;
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
./
) ) ) %8
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
;
:
:
9 0 9
$&
8
8
0
3(
.5
./
3(
3(
$
37&
6
,1
6
%DVLF8QLW
;
,1
;
6,02&2'(SUR9
3URILEXV'3
;
352),%86
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
.5
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
&7
7
7
$
$
$
&
'
'
$
$
9
$
%
$
%
.5
&$
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
63(3(
$
%
&
&
'
'
$
287
$
10
0%
6
;
,1
6
,1
9$&
%86
21
287
./
,1
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
!!!
6,02&2'(SUR9
./
$
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
,1
287
$
6<6
13($&+]9
6<6
$
$
%
$
%
$
$
6<6
5HDG\
%
&
&
6<6
7(67
5(6(7
E-24
%
%
/
/
/
1
3(
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
6ORZ
5LJKW
/RFDO
6ORZ
/HIW
/RFDO
)DVW
/HIW
/RFDO
)DVW
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
/HIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
5LJKW
Example Circuits
E.11
Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit
E.11.1
Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation"
Figure E-20: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.11.2
Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit
Figure E-21: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-25
Example Circuits
Figure E-22: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
SIMOCODE pro
E-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example Circuits
E.12
Example for the "valve" circuit
E.12.1
Circuit diagram for the "valve"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-27
<
4
,! ,! ,!
;
;
.
;
13($&+]9
3(
1
3(
3(
$
37&
;
%DVLF8QLW
6
6
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
50=
,1
50$
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
.
&$
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
2Q
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
&7
7
7
$
%
$
$
9
$
%
$
%
$
$
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVH
)HHGEDFN
OLPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
287
E-28
$
'(9,&(
%86
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
&/26(
*(1)$8/7
23(1
7(67
5(6(7
Example Circuits
Figure E-23: Circuit diagram for the "valve"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.12.2
Function circuit diagram for the "valve"
Figure E-24: Function circuit diagram for the "valve"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-29
7
4
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
%8
;
0
;
.
,! ,! ,!
3(
0 3(
$&
.
$
&7
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9
:
;
37&
;
%DVLF8QLW
50=
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
3URILEXV'3
;
$
%
$
%
352),%86
50$
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
.
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
$
9
63(3(
&$
)
1$&+]9
/
1
287
.
,!
$
$
7
7
3(
$
$
287
$
%
$
3(
6
;
,1
10
$
287
6
,1
9$&
6
,1
'(9,&(
,1
6723
*(1)$8/7
23(1
287
%86
&/26(
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
6<6
13($&+]9
6<6
5HDG\
6<6
E-30
7(67
5(6(7
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
/RFDO
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVHG
/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
6WRS
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
E.13.1
Example of the "positioner" circuit
E.13
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-25: Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.13.2
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
Figure E-26: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-31
7
4
;
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
;
;
.
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
3(
0 3(
$&
.
$
37&
;
%DVLF8QLW
'0=
50=
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
13($&+]9
3(
8
9
:
&7
7
7
50$
,1
'0$
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
9$&
.
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
$
9
$
%
&$
.
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
%
$
%
$
$
287
$
3(
10
6
;
,1
6<6
5HDG\
$
$
$
287
6
,1
9$&
6
,1
'(9,&(
,1
6723
*(1)$8/7
23(1
287
%86
&/26(
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
6<6
6<6
E-32
7(67
5(6(7
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVHG
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
&ORVHG
/RFDO
2SHQ
/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
6WRS
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVH
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
E.13.3
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
Figure E-27: Circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.13.4
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
Figure E-28: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-33
7
4
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
;
;
.
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
;
3(
0 3(
$&
.
13($&+]9
3(
8
9
:
$
&7
37&
7
7
;
%DVLF8QLW
'0=
50=
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
50$
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
.
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
&$
287
.
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
$
%
$
%
$
$
9
$
%
$
$
287
$
3(
10
6
;
,1
6<6
5HDG\
$
$
$
287
6
,1
9$&
6
,1
'(9,&(
,1
6723
*(1)$8/7
23(1
287
%86
&/26(
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
6<6
6<6
E-34
7(67
5(6(7
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVHG
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
&ORVHG
/RFDO
2SHQ
/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
6WRS
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
E.13.5
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
Figure E-29: Circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.13.6
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
Figure E-30: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-35
7
4
;
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
0
;
;
.
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
3(
0 3(
$&
.
$
37&
;
;
,1
%DVLF8QLW
50=
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
3URILEXV'3
;
352),%86
$
%
13($&+]9
3(
8
9
:
&7
7
7
50$
,1
'0$
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
.
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
$
9
63(3(
&$
.
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
%
$
%
$
$
287
$
3(
10
6
;
,1
6<6
5HDG\
$
$
$
287
6
,1
9$&
6
,1
'(9,&(
,1
6723
*(1)$8/7
23(1
287
%86
&/26(
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
6<6
6<6
E-36
7(67
5(6(7
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVHG
/RFDO
2SHQ
/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
6WRS
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
E.13.7
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
Figure E-31: Circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.13.8
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
Figure E-32: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-37
7
4
;
0
;
;
.
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
13($&+]9
0
$&
3(
3(
.
3(
8
9
:
$
&7
37&
7
7
;
%DVLFXQLW
'0=50=
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
;
,1
352),%86
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
'0$50$
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
9$&
.
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$
%
$
%
$
%
&$
.
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
$
9
$
$
287
$
3(
10
6
;
,1
6<6
5HDG\
$
$
$
287
6
,1
9$&
6
,1
'(9,&(
,1
6723
*(1)$8/7
23(1
287
%86
&/26(
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDOPRGXOH
6,02&2'(SUR9
6<6
6<6
E-38
7(67
5(6(7
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
/LPLWVZLWFK
&ORVHG
/RFDO
2SHQ
/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
6WRS
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
E.13.9
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
Figure E-33: Circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
6<6
Example Circuits
E.13.10
Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
Figure E-34: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-39
7
.
3(
,! ,! ,!
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
7
/
7
/
7
/
$/ $/ $/ $
&7
37&
7
7
%XVFRQQHFWRURQ6XE'
6
,1
6
%DVLF8QLW
;
,1
RII
6,02&2'(SUR9
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
;
$
%
$
%
4
,1
$
%
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
;
,!
352),%86
$(55
9$&
287
1$&+]9
/
1
$21
$
%
$
%
287
&$
+
)
1$&+]9
/
1
,!
287
$
%86
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
'(9,&(
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
7(67
5(6(7
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
2Q
6RIWVWDUWHU
5HVHW
6RIWVWDUWHU
)DXOW
6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
Circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
E.14.1
Example for the "soft starter" circuit
E.14
6<6
13($&+]9
$
$
9
!
!
!
E-40
6<6
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Figure E-35: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
!2%3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-41
Figure E-36: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter"
$
0
0
$&
7
7
7
3(
6,.267$57
5:
8
9
:
/
/
/
3(
3(
$/
$/
$/
3(
%UDNH
FRQWDFWRU
$FFHOHUDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
$(55
)DXOW
5HVHW
$5(6
2II
2Q
$21
'&/9
$
&$
)
1/
$&9
,!
$&9
$&9
Example Circuits
Example Circuits
E.14.2
Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
Figure E-37: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
SIMOCODE pro
E-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example Circuits
E.15
Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-43
7
4
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
.
3(
,! ,! ,!
%8
/
/
/
7
7
7
$/
$/
$/
.
$
&7
37&
7
7
%DVLFXQLW
;
6
RII
6
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
%XVFRQWDFWRURQ6XE'
,1
$
3URILEXV'3
;
63(3(
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
%
$
%
$
%
;
352),%86
$(55
&$
)
;
,!
$
%
$
%
9$&
.
287
&$
.
)
,!
287
$
$
$
9
$
1$&+]9
/
1
287
6<6
$
$
$
3(
10
,1
6<6
5HDG\
1$&+]9
/
1
287
,1
9$&
,1
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
6,02&2'(SUR9
$
$21
13($&+]9
$
,1
287
'(9,&(
%86
21!!
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
6<6
$5(6
E-44
6<6
2))
*(1)$8/7
21!
7(67
5(6(7
/RFDO
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
5LJKW
6RIWVWDUWHU
)DXOW
6RIWVWDUWHU
5HVHW
6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/HIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
E.15.1
/
/
/
1
3(
Example Circuits
Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
Figure E-38: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E-45
Figure E-39: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
$
0
0 3(
$&
7
7
7
6,.267$57
5:
8
9
:
/
/
/
$/
$/
$/
3(
3(
3(
%UDNH
FRQWDFWRU
$FFHOHUDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
)DXOW
$(55
5HVHW
2II
2Q
'&/9
1/
$5(6
$21
$
,!
$&9
&$
$&9
)
$&9
Example Circuits
Example Circuits
E.15.2
Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
Figure E-40: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
SIMOCODE pro
E-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety and Commissioning Information
for EEx Areas
F
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information
when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• commissioners
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• explosion protection
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines
• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F-1
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.1
General
Information and standards
The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes it necessary to
carefully observe the following notes and standards:
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines
• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining)
and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive
gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust are present):
BVS 06 ATEX F 001
I (M2) *)
BVS 06 ATEX F 001
II (2) GD *)
*) Notice:
The safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with
BVS 04 ATEX F 003 certificate numbers.
The devices are suitable for the protection of motors in explosive atmospheres according to the standards listed above.
Tests other than those stipulated by law ( Ordinance on industrial safety
and health) are not necessary.
Warning
All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried
out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
SIMOCODE pro
F-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.2
Setting up and Commissioning
Attention
Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices)
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device
Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current measuring module
Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/volt. measuring module
Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Digital module
Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
F.2.1
Setting the Rated Current of the Motor
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or
design test certificate of the motor).
Attention
Note the tripping class/tripping characteristic curve of the 3UF7.
Select the tripping class so that the motor is also thermally protected even
with a stalled rotor.
Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected tripping
class.
Attention
Set the response of the overload protection to "Switch off"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F-3
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s,
IA/Ie = 5.5:
TE = 11 s
IA/Ie = 5.5
Figure F-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
SIMOCODE pro
F-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.2.2
SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input
For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN 44081
and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following tripping
and restart temperatures:
Figure F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart
temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature
of the sensor):
Tripping temperature
Restart temperature
3 sensors
NFT + 4 K
NFT - 7 K
6 sensors
NFT - 5 K
NFT - 20 K
Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures
The specified temperatures are limit values.
Attention
Set the response of the activated thermistor to "Switch off"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F-5
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.2.3
Wiring of the Sensor Circuit
Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of cores of the motor feeder or other main current cables is not permitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected due to high-voltage cables that are laid parallel to each other.
Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Cable
cross section
Cable lengths at the thermistor input
without short-circuit
recognition
with short-circuit recognition 1)
2.5 mm2
2x 2,800 m
2x 250 m
1.5 mm2
2x 1,500 m
2x 150 m
mm2
2x 500 m
2x 50 m
0.5
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.
Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition of the sensor
cable.
If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during
commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried
out (mounting, demounting the system).
F.2.4
Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for Type of
Coordination 2
The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent protection devices.
Caution
Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of
coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.
SIMOCODE pro
F-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.2.5
Cable Protection
Caution
Avoid impermissibly high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40 (see chapter D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor
Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V").
F.2.6
Test
SIMOCODE pro provides users with a convenient method for checking the
complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as e.g.
contactors, circuit breakers and thermistors). This check can, for example,
be used to carry out testing according to IEC 60079-17.
This test includes a complete functional test. All three test phases must be
run through (hardware test, current feedback, deactivation of the motor contactors, see below).
The test can be carried out either by pressing the existing "TEST/RESET"
buttons or automatically via the bus.
Due to the existing self-test routines it is not necessary to add tripping currents to carry out the test
Test phases
• Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain unchanged.
• Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is an fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault,
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes if no main current is flowing
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three phases (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).
• Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s):
If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are deactivated.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F-7
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the
"TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test
phase
Status
Without main current
With main current
O.K.
O.K.
Fault *)
Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
<2s
Green
Green
Green
Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
2s-5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Deactivated
Unchanged
Deactivated
Relay test
"DEVICE" LED
>5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
LED lit/activated
Deactivated
LED flashing
Deactivated
Deactivated
LED flickering
Deactivated
LED off
*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s
Table F-3: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
SIMOCODE pro
F-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.2.7
Further Safety Instructions
Caution
Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable
digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the
IP 4x degree of protection.
When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any
danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).
Attention
The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.
F.2.8
Ambient Conditions
Permitted ambient temperature range:
• Storage/transport:
-40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation:
-25 °C to +60 °C.
F.3
Maintenance and Repairs
The devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.4
Guarantee
The guarantee presumes the observance
information of the operating instructions
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device
Order
Current measuring module
Order
Current/voltage measuring
module
Order
Digital module
Order
and the complete manual
Order
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
of this safety and commissioning
number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
number 3UF7970-0AA01-0
F-9
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.5
Further Information
You will find further information about the 3UF7
• in the Siemens catalogs LV1 or LV1T "Low-voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON"
or
• on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi/cd.
SIMOCODE pro
F-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Index
Numerics
0/4 A -20 mA signal monitoring 5-14
3UF50 compatibility mode 9-1
9-pole SUB-D connection 13-31
A
A/B terminals 13-31
Abbreviations A-3, B-3
Abbreviations and specifications A-3
Access to data records in STEP 7 12-21
Accessories 1-19, 1-30, C-15
Acknowledgement of faults 10-6
Active control stations 4-57, A-2
Active control stations, contactor & lamp
controls and status signal of the control
functions 4-57
Active power monitoring 1-11, 5-1, 5-12,
Gl-1
Actual analog signal value 1-16
Acyclic receive 7-15
Acyclic send 6-3, 6-16
Acyclic services 6-16, 7-15
Acyclic signaling data 6-3, 6-16, 12-1
Acyclic writing and reading of
DPV1 data records 12-15
Addressing plug 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,
13-29, Gl-1
Alarm, faults and system messages 15-1
Alarms 12-6, 12-13
AM - inputs 7-12
AM - output function block 6-10
Ambient conditions F-10
Analog connecting blocks 1-33
Analog module (AM) 1-2, 1-12, 1-18,
1-27, 1-28, 5-14, D-8, Gl-1
Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-12
Analog module open circuit 15-2
Analog module outputs 6-1, 6-3, 6-10
Analog module pin assignment 13-17
Analog temperature monitoring 1-9, 5-1,
5-21
Analog value recording 8-1 to 8-3
Analog values 1-8
Another start permitted 15-2
Apparent power 1-16
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Assignment of cyclic control and
signaling data for predefined
control functions B-40
Automatic acknowledgement
of faults reset 10-6
Auto-Reset 3-9, 10-10
B
Basic factory default settings 2-2, 14-2,
E-2, Gl-2
Basic unit (BU) 1-10, 1-20, C-2, Gl-2
Basic unit outputs 6-3
Basic unit inputs 7-3
Basic unit pin assignment 13-9
Baud rate Gl-1
Binary connecting blocks 1-33
Binary inputs 1-9, 7-1
Binary inputs on the basic units
and digital modules 7-1
Bistable relay outputs 1-9
Blocked positioner 15-2
Blocking 15-2
Blocking limit 3-11
Blocking protection Gl-2
Basic unit - input settings 7-5
Basic unit - inputs function block 7-4
Basic unit outputs 6-5
Bus Gl-2
Bus fault/PLC/DCS fault response 10-18
Bus monitoring 10-17, 10-18
Bus parameters 12-1
Bus segment Gl-2
Bus termination modules 13-32
Bus/PLC fault - reset 10-18
Buttons D-11
C
Cable cross sections 13-7
Cable lengths D-4
Cable length
of the sensor circuit cables
Cable protection F-7
Cables 13-7
Catalogs LV1 or LV1T F-10
F-6
Index-1
Index
Changing of the parameters is not permissible in the current mode 15-2
Channel-related diagnostics 12-6, 12-12
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor
F-5
Check list for selecting the device
series 1-8
Circuit breaker (MCCB) 1-13, 4-23, B-43,
E-10, E-11
Circuit breaker control 1-20
Class Gl-2
Class 1 master 12-2, 12-15, Gl-3
Class 2 master 12-2, Gl-3
Class interval 3-11
Clockwise rotation 4-27
Cold starting 10-8
Cold starting function test 10-8
Color coding of the connection cable
13-28, 13-30
Commissioning 2-9, 14-1 to 14-3, F-3
Communication 1-14, 12-1
Communication principle 12-4
Compatibility mode 1-14
Configuration fault 15-2
Configuration for SIMOCODE pro V
(example) 13-26
Configuration of the diagnostic
response 12-6
Configuring a reversing starter 2-1
Connecting cables 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, Gl-3
Connecting plugs with sockets 1-34
Connecting system components
to the system interface 13-27, 13-29
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the
9-pole SUB-D socket 13-31
Connection D-4
Connection cross sections
D-4, D-7 to D-10
Connection for voltage measuring
D-6
Contactor 4-57
Contactor & lamp controls A-2
Control circuit D-7, D-8
Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-19, 4-27,
4-31, 4-41, 4-47, 4-52
Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-33,
7-1
Control function 4-1, 4-2
Control function
"Circuit breaker" (MCCB) 4-22
"Dahlander" 4-31, 4-34
"Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation" 4-34
"Direct starter" 4-17
"Overload relay" 4-16
"Pole-changing switch" 4-38
"Pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" 4-41
"Positioner" 4-47
"Reversing starter" 4-19
"Soft starter" 4-52
"Soft starter with reversing contactor"
E-43
"Star-delta starter" 4-24
"Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" 4-27
"Valve" 4-45
Control functions 1-13, 4-10, 4-57, Gl-3
Control programs 1-2
Control station - local control 1-6, 4-3
Control station - operator panel 4-2, 4-4
Control station - PC 4-2, 4-4
Control station - PLC/DCS 4-2, 4-3
Control station settings 4-9
Control stations 4-1, Gl-3
Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states 6-4
Controlling the main contactor in the motor
feeder 6-4
Cooling down period 3-7
Cooling down time 1-16, Gl-4
Cos phi 1-25, Gl-4
Counter 11-2
Counter settings 11-9
Counter-clockwise rotation 4-27
Counters 1-15, 11-8
Counters logic modules 11-8
Cover 1-22
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Current limits 1-10, 3-11
Current limits monitoring 1-8, 1-10, 5-1,
5-5
Current limits monitoring I< 5-7
Current limits monitoring I> 5-6
Current limits function block 5-5
Current limits values 5-5
Current measuring 1-8, D-5
Current measuring module (IM)
1-17, 1-24, 5-5, 13-19, C-3 to C-7, D-5, Gl-4
with an external current transformer
(interposing transformer) 13-22
Current measuring
with current measuring modules
13-19, 13-20
Current transformer 3-4
Current/voltage measuring module
(UM) 1-2, 1-17, 1-25, 5-5, 5-8, 5-12,
13-20, C-8 to C-12, D-5, Gl-4
Cyclic receive 7-14, 12-5
Cyclic data transfer 12-15
Cyclic output of an analog value 6-13
Cyclic send 6-14, 12-5
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Cyclic send data 6-15
Cyclic services 1-14, 6-15, 7-14
Cyclic signaling data 2-12, 6-3, 6-15, 12-1
D
Dahlander 1-13, 1-20, 4-33, B-46, E-16,
E-17
Dahlander control function 4-32
Dahlander reversing starter 4-12
Dahlander starter 4-12
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation 4-36, 4-37, B-47, E-18 to E-20
Data access 12-5
Data formats B-1
Data record 130 Basic device parameter 1 B-17
Data record 131 Basic device parameter 2 B-22
Data record 132 Extended device parameter 1 B-26
Data record 133 Extended device parameter 2 B-32
Data record 139 - marking B-35
Data record 160 - communication
parameters B-36
Data record 165 - comments B-36
Data record 202 - acyclic receive B-37
Data record 203 - acyclic send B-38
Data record 224 - password protection
B-39
Data record 67 - process image of the
outputs B-6
Data record 69 - process image of the
inputs B-7
Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-9
Data record 94 - measured values B-15
Data record 95 - service/statistical
data B-16
Data records 12-21, B-1, B-2
Debounce time 1-28
Degree of protection (according to
60529) D-2
Delay parameter 3-9
Delay pre-warning 3-9
Delays inputs 7-9
Device data 12-2
Device data (GSD file) Gl-4
Device parameters 12-1
Device series 1-2
Devices 1-17
Diagnostic alarm 12-6, 12-13
Diagnostic data 1-16, 12-6
Diagnostics
for device errors 12-6
for device faults 12-6
for messages 12-6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Diagnostics
for warnings 12-6
Digital module (DM) 1-18, 1-27, D-7, Gl-4
Digital module 1 inputs 7-3
Digital module 1 outputs 6-3
Digital module 2 inputs 7-3
Digital module 2 outputs 6-3
Digital module outputs 6-8
Digital module pin assignment 13-11
Dimension drawings C-1
Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 1-13, 4-12,
4-18, B-41, E-6, E-7
Direction of rotation 4-19
Display D-3, D-7 to D-9, D-11
DM - inputs function blocks 7-8
DM - inputs settings 7-9
Door adapter 1-19, 1-30, C-15, Gl-5
Double 0 15-2
Double 1 15-2
DP master 12-2, Gl-5
DP master
with DPV1 alarm support
(DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
without DPV1 alarm support
(DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
DP masters
which are operated in
"DPV1" DP mode 12-20
which are operated in
"S7 compatible" DP mode 12-20
DP slave/DP standard slave Gl-5
DPV1 slave 12-2
DPV1 slave via GSD 12-15
E
Early warning and fault signals 1-16
Earth fault monitoring 5-1, 5-2
Earth-fault module (EM) 1-18, 1-27, 1-28,
D-9, Gl-5
Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-1
Earth-fault monitoring 1-8 to 1-10, 1-18,
Gl-5
EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12, 5-22
Electronic overload protection 1-10
EMC emitted interference
according to IEC 60947-1 D-2
EMC stability
according to IEC 60947-1 D-2
Emergency start 1-14, 10-2, 10-16, Gl-5
Enabled control command 4-7
Enables 4-1, 4-7
Error protocolling with time stamp 1-16
Error types 12-12
Evaluating diagnostic data 12-19
Example circuits E-1
Index-3
Index
Example
for connecting the terminals of the analog module 13-18
for connecting the terminals of the basic
unit 13-10
for connecting the terminals of the digital module 13-12
for connecting the terminals of the
earth-fault module 13-14
for connecting the terminals of the temperature module 13-16
Execution ON command 15-2
Execution stop command 15-3
Execution time 4-14, 4-15
Expansion modules 1-27, C-14, D-7, Gl-6
Explosion protection F-1
External current transformer 13-22
External earth fault 15-3
External earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-2
with summation current transformer
5-4
External fault 1-14, 10-2, 10-9, 10-10,
15-3
External fault response 10-10
External fault settings 10-10
F
Fault - Antivalence 15-3
Fault - Bus 15-3
Fault - End position 15-3
Fault - PLC/DCS 10-17, 15-3
Fault - Power failure UVO 10-15
Fault - Temporary components 15-3
Fault - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-8
Feedback (F) OFF 15-3
Feedback (F) ON 15-4
Feedback faults 1-16
Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-38
Feedback time 4-14, 4-15
Fixing lugs for screw attachments 13-2
Flashing 1-15, 11-2, 11-19
Flashing logic modules 11-19
Flashing settings 11-19
Flickering 1-15, 11-2, 11-20
Flickering logic modules 11-20
Flickering settings 11-20
Frequencies D-2
Function block Gl-6
Function test F-7
G
General representation of the input
types 7-2
GSD 9-2, 12-2
GSD file 1-32, 12-16
Guarantee F-9
H
Hardware faults 15-4
Hardware test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Heating up motor model 1-16, 3-7
Hysteresis
for the current limits I> 5-6
for the current limits I< 5-7
for voltage, power factor (cos phi),
power 5-9
for 0/4-20 mA signal 5-16
for monitoring functions 5-23
I
Identification-related diagnostics 12-10
Independent operation 1-3, Gl-6
Information and standards F-2
Input characteristic curve D-4
Inputs 7-1, 7-3
Inputs (binary) D-4, D-7
Installation guidelines
for the PROFIBUS DP 13-32
Installation location D-2
Integration of SIMOCODE pro
as DPV1 Slave via GSD in the configuration software 12-16
as S7 slave via
OM SIMOCODE pro 12-18
as SIMATIC PDM objekt (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP-7-HW Config 12-17
in SIMATIC S7 with
OM SIMOCODE ES 12-20
Interfaces 13-1
Interlocking time 4-13, 4-14, 4-19, 5-20
Internal comments 1-16
Internal earth fault 15-4
Internal earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-3
K
Key-operated switch operation
4-5
L
Lamp controls 4-11, 4-57
Lamp test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Legend strip 1-22, 1-23
Light-emitting diodes of the operator
panel 6-1
Limit monitor 1-15, 11-2, 11-21 to 11-23
Limit monitor logic modules 11-21
Limit temperature 3-12
List of abbreviations 1-1
Load type 4-13
Local 4-5, 4-6
Local control 4-9
Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2, 7-8
Locking the contactor 4-13
Logic module 1-15, 11-1, 11-2, 11-15,
Gl-6
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
M
Main circuit D-5
Maintenance F-10
Making internal assignments 4-52, 4-55
Manual operation 4-5
Manufacturer's identification 12-9
Master Gl-6
Master PROFIBUS address 12-9
Measurement frequency D-5
Memory module 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,
13-29, Gl-7
Memory module "park position" 1-23
Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6, 4-9
Modes of operation 4-1, 4-5, 4-6
Module fault 15-4
Monitoring 1-8, 1-10
Monitoring additional process variables via
the analog module 1-12
Monitoring current limits Gl-7, 5-6, 5-7
Monitoring earth faults Gl-7
Monitoring for further availability 1-11
Monitoring for undervoltage 1-11
Monitoring functions 5-1, Gl-7
Monitoring of 0/4 A - 20 mA 5-1, Gl-8
Monitoring of the motor current 5-5
Monitoring PLC/DCS 1-14, 10-2
Monitoring temperature 1-18
Monitoring the number of starts 5-19,
Gl-7
Monitoring the power factor 5-10, 11-23
Monitoring the voltage 5-8, Gl-8
Motor control 4-1
Motor control functions 1-20
Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3
Motor model 10-16
Motor operating hours 1-16
Motor protection 3-1, Gl-8
Motor protection functions 3-2
Motor stop times 1-16
Motor switching state 1-16
Motor temperature 1-10
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
4-12
Mounting 13-1, 13-3, D-3, D-5, D-7 to
D-9, D-11
Mounting and wiring 13-2
Mounting lugs 13-2 to 13-5
Mounting
the basic units and expansion
modules 13-3
Mounting
the current measuring modules
13-4
the current/voltage measuring
modules 13-5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
N
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1
Network contactor 4-27
No start permissible 15-4
Non-maintained command mode 4-13
Non-volatile element 11-2, 1-15 to 11-18
Non-volatile elements logic modules
11-16
Non-volatile elements settings 11-18
NOR function 11-15, 11-18
Notes on parameterizing 14-2
Number of motor starts 1-16, 5-19
Number of overload trippings 1-16
Number of permissible starts 1-16
Number of starts overshooting limit 5-18
Number of starts pre-warning 5-18
Number of start-ups 1-12
O
Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP 9-2
Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro
1-19, 1-31, 12-2
OFF command-reset 10-10
Operator panel 4-9
OP - buttons function block 7-7
Operating data 1-16
Operating hours 1-12, 5-17
Operating hours monitoring 5-18, Gl-8
Operating panel buttons 7-7
Operating range D-3
Operating, service and diagnostic data
1-16
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream
from the Y link 1-14
Operation hours monitoring 5-1
Operation monitoring 5-17, Gl-8
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1-14,
10-2, 10-11, 10-12, 15-4, Gl-8
Operator enable 4-8
Operator Panel (OP) 1-17, 1-22, 13-6,
C-13, D-11, Gl-8
Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6
Operator panel LEDs 6-3, 6-6
Output of the effective motor current
6-11, 6-12
Output response of the timer 11-11
Outputs 6-1
Overload 3-6, 15-5
Overload and Unbalance 15-5
Overload protection 1-10, 3-1 to 3-4,
3-11, Gl-9
Overload relay 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12, 4-16,
B-40, E-3, E-5
Overshooting the limit value 11-21
Overtemperature 5-22
Overview of system components 1-17
Index-5
Index
P
Panel reset 10-10
Parameter 4-13
Parameter blocking during start-up
active 15-5
Parameter is faulty ("Gen. fault"
category) 15-5
Parameterization software 1-31
Parameterization start-up 12-15
Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-22
Parameterization with
SIMOCODE ES 12-6
Pause time 3-7, 4-14, Gl-9
PC cable 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, 13-29, Gl-9
PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-31
Permissible ambient temperature D-2
Permissible number of starts
exceeded 15-6
Permissible starts 5-19
Phase unbalance 1-10, 1-16, 3-10, 15-6
Phase cycle 1-16, 1-25, Gl-4
Phase failure 1-8, 1-10
Phase sequence identification 1-12
Pin assignment of the removable
terminals 13-9, 13-11, 13-13, 13-15,
13-17, 13-21
Pin cross section 13-19, 13-20
Plant downtimes 5-17
PLC/DCS 4-5, 4-9
PLC/DCS monitoring 10-17, 10-18
Plugs (analog) 1-33
Plugs (binary) 1-33
Pole-changing switch 4-12, 4-39, B-48,
E-21, E-23
with reversal of the direction of
rotation 4-12, 4-43, 4-44, B-49, E-24 to
E-26
Positioner 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-51, 10-11,
10-12, B-51, E-30 to E-39
Power considerations 1-8
Power consumption D-3
Power factor 1-16
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
1-11, 5-1, 5-10, Gl-9
Power failure monitoring 1-14, 10-2,
10-14, 10-15, 15-6
Power failure stored-energy time D-4
Power management 1-8
Power-up time 3-4
Prerequisites for commissioning and
servicing 14-2
Preventive maintenance 14-6
Pre-warning 3-9
Pre-warning - overload (I >115%) 15-6
Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP
to the basic unit 13-31
Procedure for joining connecting cables to
the system interface 13-28, 13-29
Process alarm 12-6, 12-14
Process and diagnostic alarm 12-15
Process monitoring 1-10
PROFIBUS DP 1-14, 1-19, 1-31, 2-2, 4-4,
4-52, 4-54, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-14, 6-16, 7-15,
10-6, 12-2, Gl-9
PROFIBUS DP interface 1-14, D-3, Gl-9
PROFIBUS DP on
a 9-pole SUB D socket 13-31
PROFIBUS DPV1 6-16, 7-15, 12-2, Gl-10
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines 13-32, Gl-10
Programmable logical controller (PLC)
Gl-10
Programming Device (PD) Gl-10
Protecting functions 1-10
PTC 3-12
Pump 1-6, 1-10
Push-through opening 13-19, 13-20, D-5
Push-through system 1-17, 13-19, 13-20
R
Rail connection D-6
Rail connection system 13-19, 13-20
Rated control voltage D-3
Rated insulation voltage D-3, D-5, D-7
Rated motor current F-3
Rated operational voltage D-5
Rated surge voltage strength D-3, D-5,
D-7
Reading data 12-3
Reading out statistical data 14-6
Real power 1-16
Relay outputs 6-1, D-4, D-7
Relay test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Remote operation 4-5
Remote reset 10-10
Remote/automatic 4-5, 4-6
Removable terminals 13-2, 13-7, 14-10
Repairs F-10
Replacing a basic unit 14-9
Replacing an expansion unit 14-9
Replacing the current measuring module
and the current/voltage measuring
module 14-10
Required function is not supported 15-6
Reset 1-14, 3-9, 10-2
Reset function 10-3, 10-4
Reset parameter 3-9
Reset settings 10-6
Resistive load 4-13
Responses x, 3-3
Restart delay 10-14
Restart delay (staggered) 10-15
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Restart temperature F-5
Reversing starter 1-8, 1-13, 2-1, 2-2, 2-9,
4-12, 4-21, B-42, E-8, E-9
S
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-15
Safe isolation according to
IEC 60947-1 D-2
Safety and commissioning information for
EEx areas F-1
Safety instructions F-9
Save switching command 4-13
Saving parameters
from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic
unit 14-8
from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES
file 14-7
from the basic unit into the memory
module 14-7
from the memory module into the basic
unit 14-7
Screw attachment 13-2 to 13-5
Screw terminals 1-33
Sensor circuit D-9
Sensor circuit error 3-13
Sensor error 3-13
Sensor measuring circuits 1-11
Sensor types 1-29
Service data 1-16
Service pack 1 1-31
Servicing 14-1
Set current D-5
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
via SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-4
via the addressing plug 2-11, 14-4
Setting the rated current of the motor F-3
Setting up F-3
Setting up in potentially explosive
areas F-9
Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2
Short circuit D-5
Short-circuit protection
according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of
coordination 2 F-6
Short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)
D-4
Signal conditioner 1-15, 11-2, 11-13,
11-14
Signal conditioner logic modules 11-13
Signal conditioner settings 11-15
Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements 11-17
Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1
Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-33
SIMATIC Gl-10, Gl-11
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-2, Gl-10
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2
SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2
SIMATIC S7 1-32, 12-16
SIMOCODE ES 1-31, 2-11, 4-1, 6-1, 7-1,
8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-10, 11-1, 12-1, 14-2,
14-7, B-35, Gl-10
SIMOCODE ES Graphic 1-19, 1-31
SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-32
SIMOCODE ES Professional 1-19, 1-31,
4-4, 12-2, 12-22
SIMOCODE ES Smart 1-19, 1-31
SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 +
Service Pack 1 1-31
SIMOCODE ES software 2-2
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
12-19
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager
(OM) Gl-10
SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-30
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library Gl-11
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3, Gl-11
Slave Gl-11
Slave diagnostics 12-9
Slave modes of operation 12-15
Slide control 1-20, 4-50
Slider control function 4-49
Smooth running down time 4-56
Snap-on mounting 13-3
Socket assignment table - analog A-12
Socket assignment table - digital A-5
Sockets (analog) 1-33
Sockets (binary) 1-33
Soft starter 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-53, B-52,
E-40 to E-42
Soft starter control 1-20
Soft starter control function 4-53
Soft starter with reversing contactor
4-12, 4-54 to 4-56, B-53, E-44 to E-46
Software 1-19, 1-31
Software tools 1-31
Solenoid valve 4-12
Specifications A-4, B-3
Stall limit 3-11
Stall protection 1-10, 3-2, 3-3, 3-11
Standard diagnostics 12-6, 12-15
Standard function 1-14, 10-1,10-2, Gl-11
Standard motor feeders 1-8
Standard mounting rail mounting 13-4,
13-5
Standards F-2
Star contactor 4-27
Star-delta connection 4-28
Star-delta reversing starter 4-12
Star-delta starter 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12,
B-44, E-12, E-13
Index-7
Index
Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation 4-29, 4-30, B-45,
E-14, E-15
Station Gl-11
Station status 12-8
Station status 1 12-8
Station status 2 12-9
Station status 3 12-9
Statistical data 14-6, Gl-11
Status - cooling down time active 15-6
Status - emergency start executed 15-6
Status - Test Position Feedback (TPF)
15-6
Status messages 12-6, 12-11, 12-15, A-2
Status signal 4-11, 4-57
States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test 10-5, F-8
STEP 7 12-16 to 12-18, Gl-11
Stop time 1-12, 5-17
Stop time > 15-6
Stop time monitoring 5-18, Gl-11
Strip lengths 13-7, 13-21
Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-18
Supplying the inputs
of the basic unit 13-8
of the digital module 13-11
Switch off time 3-4
Switching from star to delta 4-24, 4-27,
4-30
Switching interval 4-13, 4-25, 4-38
Switching the direction of rotation 4-19,
4-27, 4-34, 4-41, 4-54
Switching the direction of travel 4-48
Switching the speed 4-31, 4-34, 4-38,
4-41
System description 1-1
System interface 1-17, 13-28, D-5
System interface cover 1-19, 1-30,
13-27, 13-29, Gl-12
System interfaces 13-29, D-3, D-7 to D-9,
D-11
System interfaces
on basic units, expansion modules, current measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring
modules 13-27
System interfaces on the operator
panel 13-29
T
Tables A-1
Target groups 4-1
Technical data D-1
Telegram description 12-5
Temperature in the sensor measuring
circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-18,
1-27, 1-29, 15-7, D-9, Gl-12
Temperature module - warning level
overshot 15-7
Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-3,
7-10, 7-11
Temperature module out of range 15-7
Temperature module pin assignment
13-15
Temperature monitoring 1-11, Gl-12
Temperature monitoring system 1-29
Temperature sensors 1-2, 5-21
Test 1-14, 10-2, 10-5, F-7
Test function 10-3, 10-4
Test function block 10-3
Test phases 10-5, F-8
Test position 10-7
Test position feedback (TPF) 1-14, 10-2,
10-7, 10-8, 15-7, Gl-12
Test shutdown 15-7
TEST/RESET button 10-10, D-3
Thermal motor model 10-4
Thermistor motor protection 1-8, D-4
Thermistor open circuit 15-7
Thermistor protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2,
Gl-12
Thermistor sensors 1-10
Thermistor short circuit 15-7
Thermistor trip level 15-7
Thermistors 3-12
Tightening torques 13-7, 13-21, D-7 to
D-10
Time frame of the start process 5-19
Time synchronization 1-14, 12-24
Time to trip 1-16
Timer 11-2, 11-10
Timer logic modules 11-10
Timer settings 11-12
Timers 1-15
Timestamp function block 10-20
Timestamping 1-14, 10-2, 10-19, 10-20
Timestamping in the fault memory 10-19
TM - inputs function block 7-10
Torque 4-50
Transferring the parameters to the basic
device 2-9
Transformation ratio 13-22
Transmitting data 12-4
Tripping characteristic curve F3
Tripping class 3-4, 3-5, F-3, Gl-12
Tripping current 1-16
Tripping temperature F-5
Tripping time 3-5
Truth table for 2I/1O logic modules 11-6
Truth table for 3I/1O logic modules 11-3
Truth table for 5I/2O logic modules 11-7
SIMOCODE pro
Index-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Truth tables 1-15, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5
Type of current D-5
Type of load 3-8
Types of signals/output responses
11-14, 11-17
U
Unbalance 1-8
Unbalance limit 3-10
Unbalance protection 3-1 to 3-3, 3-10,
Gl-12
Undershooting the limit value 11-21
UVO fault 10-14
V
Valve 4-46, B-50, E-27, E-29
Valve control 1-20
Valve control function 4-46
Valves 1-8, 1-13
Variants for slide control 4-50
Versions of digital modules 1-27
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Voltage measuring 1-8
Voltage monitoring 1-8, 1-11, 5-1, 5-8,
Gl-12
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA 15-8
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> overshot
15-8
Warning level cos phi 15-7
Warning level I 15-7
Warning level I> overshot 15-7
Warning level P 15-7
Warning level P> overshot 15-7
Warning level U 15-7
Warnings 1-14
Watchdog 1-14, 10-2, 10-17
Watchdog settings 10-17
Win SIMOCODE DP converter 1-32, 9-1,
Gl-12
Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-32
Wiring 13-1, 13-7
Wiring of the sensor circuit F-6
Wiring
the basic units and expansion
modules 13-7
the current measuring modules
13-19
the current/voltage measuring
modules 13-20
the removable terminals 13-9, 13-18,
13-31
Writing data 12-3
Writing/reading data records B-2
Wrong password 15-8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Index-9
Index
SIMOCODE pro
Index-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Meaning
Acycl.
Acyclic
AM
Analog module
AS
Alarm switch
AS
Auxiliary switch
AWG
American Wire Gauge
BU
Basic unit
CF
Control function
Cycl.
Cyclic
DCS
Process control system
DM
Digital module
DP
Decentralized periphery
EM
Earth-fault module
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
Electromotive force
F
Feedback
FC
Feedback CLOSE
FMS
Fieldbus message specification
FO
Feedback OPEN
GSD
Device data
IM
Current measuring module
LC
Local control
NTC
Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OM
Object manager
OP
Operator panel
OPO
Operational protection OFF
PCS
Process control system
PDM
Process device manager
PG
Programming device
PLC
Programmable logical controller
PTC
Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
TC
Torque switch CLOSE
Th
Thermistor
TM
Temperature module
TO
Torque switch OPEN
TPF
Test position feedback
UM
Current/voltage measuring module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Abbreviations-1
List of Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
Abbreviations-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
Active power monitoring
SIMOCODE pro offers the option of two-phase active power
monitoring in which not only the current, but also the power
factor (cos phi) is taken into account.
Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the "hardwarerelated" allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic
unit without a PC/programming device.
Analog module (AM)
The analog module offers the option of expanding BU 2 with
optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). This
makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped on a 0/4 mA - 20 mA
signal. In this case, the automation system has free access to
the measured process variables.
Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed with which data is transmitted and
indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud
rate = bit rate).
With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
are possible.
Basic factory default settings
The basic factory default settings are used to reset all
parameters of a switching device to the default settings to
which they were set at the factory.
The basic factory default settings can be configured via the
"TEST/RESET" button on the basic device or via the
SIMOCODE ES software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-1
Glossary
Basic unit (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required
when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure
width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important
motor control functions and motor protection functions.
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and
fulfils all requirements for motor protection, motor control,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Blocking protection
After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking
limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor
can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload
protection. The blocking protection is only active after the
parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10
after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal
and mechanical loads as well as premature deterioration of
the motor.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are
connected. It has two defined ends. With PROFIBUS, the bus
is a two-wire line (copper conductor) or a fiber optic cable.
Bus segment
The PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment.
A bus segment has at least two stations, one of which must
be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected
to a bus segment.
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping
time in which SIMOCODE must trip cold at the 7.2-fold set
current Ie (motor protection according to IEC 60947). If e.g.
Class 10 was set for SIMOCODE pro, it is guaranteed that the
(cold) motor will be switched off at a 7.2-fold set current after
10 seconds. The tripping class can be set to 8 different
settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Class 1 master
Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange
with other stations is characteristic for this type of master.
Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
Class 2 master
Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example,
• PC/programming devices with the
"SIMOCODE ES professional" software
• PDM (PCS7)
• PC with "SIMATIC powercontrol" software (power management).
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the
individual basic units with their current measuring modules
and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator
panels. They are available in various versions and lengths
(ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m).
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m
per system!
Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are
used for controlling load feeders. They have the following
important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current
flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main
circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the ON status
• Switching off in case of a fault.
Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are
issued to the motor. The "Control stations" function block is
used for administration, switching and priorization of these
different control stations. With this, SIMOCODE pro allows
the parallel administration of up to four different control
stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different
control commands can be transmitted from every control
station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control
commands are issued via pushbutton.
• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the
automation system (remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control
station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES
software.
• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the
buttons of the operator panel in the switchgear cabinet
door.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-3
Glossary
Cooling down time
The cooling down time is the specified time after which an
overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Current Measuring module (IM)
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic
units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device
series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to
the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of
the motor). The current measuring modules cover current
ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing
transformers up to 820 A.
Current/voltage measuring module
The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of
using a current/voltage measuring module instead of a
current measuring module.
As well as measuring the motor current, current/voltage
measuring modules also
• monitor voltages up to 690 V
• evaluate and monitor power and the power factor (cos phi)
• Monitoring of the phase cycle.
Device data (GSD file)
The device data (GSD) contains a description of the
respective switching device. It is used for integrating the
switching device into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard
master system (automation system).
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the
types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic
unit 2, if required.
A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic
unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs.
Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system
interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible
location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast
parameterization.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
DP master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle
between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the
DP master sends the cyclic control data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signaling data
to the DP master.
DP slave/DP standard slave
A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the
PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Earth-fault module (EM)
The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing
powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with
the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it
possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and
1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function
which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V
can be expanded by an additional and more precise external
earth-fault monitoring system.
Earth-fault monitoring
The basic units have
• internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit
evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from
the total current. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only
possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
which are either grounded directly or grounded with low
impedance.
• external earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
the earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents
using an externally connected summation current
transformer (e.g 3UL22).
Emergency start
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from
SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the
motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping. This
function can be used to:
• enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload switchoff
• influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor
model), if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible
for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor
model.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-5
Glossary
Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion
modules are available:
• Digital module (DM)
• Analog module (AM)
• Earth-fault module (EM)
• Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an
enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with
2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable
terminals.
Function block
Predefined function blocks for control functions, logic
functions and standard functions.
The digital plugs and sockets have not already been
connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay
outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connecting the
plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to
his/her respective application.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the
automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and
controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can also be easily
connected at a later period in time, if required.
Logic module
Logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions
are implemented with logic modules.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and
is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro
parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replacement.
Monitoring current limits
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring.
Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in
good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
overload limit can e.g. be an indiction that there is a dirty filter
on a pump or that a motor bearing is running more and more
sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint
that a drive motor belt is worn out.
Monitoring earth faults
The basic units have
• internal earth-fault monitoring:
via current measuring modules or current/voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3phase connection in networks which are either grounded
directly or grounded with low impedance
• external earth-fault monitoring:
via a summation current transformer and earth-fault
module is normally used for networks which are grounded
with high impedance.
Monitoring functions
The monitoring functions
• Earth-fault monitoring
• Current limit monitoring
• Voltage monitoring
• Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• 0/4 A - 20 mA signal monitoring
• Operation monitoring
• Analog temperature monitoring
function - similar to motor protection and motor control - "in
the background". They can be active or not depending on the
chosen control function.
Monitoring the number of starts
The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to
protect system parts (motor, switching devices such as e.g.
soft starters and converters) from too many impermissible
start processes within a parameterizable time frame and thus
to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful
for commissioning or manual control.
Monitoring the voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of a threephase network or a one-phase network for undervoltage for
voltage limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage
measuring modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-7
Glossary
Monitoring the 0/4 A - 20 mA signal
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog
signals of a measurement transformer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA
output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA"
function block via the analog module.
Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for currentdependent motor protection:
• Overload protection
• Unbalance protection
• Blocking protection
• Thermistor protection.
Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of
motor control centers. It can be used with both the
SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as with the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status
LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button
and makes the system interface externally available.
Operating hours monitoring
The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of
recording the operating hours (service life) of a motor, and
generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time
if required.
Operation monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop
times of a motor and restrict the number of motor start-ups
in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due
to failed motors because they were either running too long or
they were stopped for too long a period of time.
Operational protection OFF (OPO)
The "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts
the positioner into the safe mode and switches the motor off.
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in
compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set
to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response
of the motor when switched off under normal operating
conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted
and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent startups within a short period of time possible.
PC cable
A PC is connected via its serial interface to the system
interface of a basic unit with the PC cable for device
parameterization.
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Power factor monitoring monitors the load state of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous
motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks, whose loads vary
greatly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi)
is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement
between voltage and current in one phase.
PROFIBUS
Process fieldbus, European process and fieldbus standard as
defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS).
It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical
properties for a serial bit fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUScompatible automation systems and field devices at the
cubicle and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP
protocols (decentralized periphery), FMS (fieldbus message
specification), PA (process automatization) or TF (technological functions).
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized
periphery).
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange
between the central DP devices and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DP interface
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface
(SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Expansion of the DP protocol.
This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic,
control and test data.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS
installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-9
Glossary
must be adhered to. They contain important information
about the cable arrangement and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Programmable logical controller (PLC)
Control whose function is stored as a program in the control
unit. The PLC consists of CPU, memory, input/output
modules and an internal bus system. The periphery and the
programming language are based on the needs of the control
engineering.
Programming device (PD)
A programming device is normally a PC which is industrycompatible, compact and transportable. It is characterized by
a special hardware and software configuration for SIMATIC
programmable logical controllers.
SIMATIC
Term for industrial automation products and systems from
Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(process device manager).
The following options are available:
• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
• PDM, integrated into STEP7.
SIMOCODE ES
Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro,
which is runnable on a PC/programming device under
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM
Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES
Professional and the SIMOCODE pro object manager are
installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES
Professional can be called directly from the Step7 HW
configuration. This enables simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7
configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library is used to connect
SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control
system. It contains
• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the
respective diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• the elements necessary for operator control and process
monitoring (symbols and faceplate).
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave and has the
following characteristics:
• it supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process
alarms)
• it is parameterizable.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return
Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions which can be
activated according to need and set individually for each
motor feeder.
They are already available, work independently of the
selected control function and can be used/activated as
optional supplements.
Station
Device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
e.g. master, slave.
Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which e.g.
can be read out with SIMOCODE ES under "Target system >
Service data/statistical data".
STEP 7
Engineering system. Contains programming languages to
create user programs for SIMATIC-S7 controls.
Stop time monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in
order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because
they were either running too long (wear out) or they were
stopped for too long a period of time.
System interface cover IP54
Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or
on the operator panel from soiling or to seal it.
Temperature module (TM)
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature
monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Glossary-11
Glossary
measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire system) can be
connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully
integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also
available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, the bearings or the coolant or gear box
temperature. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor
types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard,
fluid or gaseous media.
Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).
Test position feedback (TPF)
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is
isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is
connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status.
Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder
without a current in the main circuit.
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to
connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the
motor temperature.
Tripping class
See "Class".
Unbalance protection
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and
transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable
response can be tripped when an adjustable limit is overshot.
If the phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction in the
tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve
takes place automatically since the heat development in
motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring.
A three-phase current network or a one-phase network can
be monitored for undervoltage, direction of rotation (for
three-phase current) or availability.
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP
parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Sender (please complete)
Name
Comany / department
To
SIEMENS AG
A&D CD MM3
Address
Telephone
92220 Amberg, Germany
Fax:
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual
Did you notice an error while reading this manual?
If so, please let us know using this form.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
w w w . s i e m e n s . com / s i m o c o d e
Order-No. 3UF7970-0AA00-0